Upload
others
View
3
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
MURUGAPPA POLYTECHNIC COLLEGE (A Government Aided Academically Autonomous Institution)
Sathyamurthy Nagar, Avadi, Chennai – 600 062
DIPLOMA COURSE
IN
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
FULL TIME 3 YEAR REGULAR, 31/2 YEAR SANDWICH & 4 YEAR PART TIME
MPC M SCHEME
REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM
&
SYLLABUS
2016
Page 1 of 260
MURUGAPPA POLYTECHNIC COLLEGE
Sathyamurthy Nagar, Chennai-62
(Academically Autonomous Institution)
REGULATIONS 2016
M SCHEME
REGARDING ADMISSION, EVALUATION, AWARD OF DIPLOMA UNDER ACADEMIC AUTONOMY APPROVED IN THE
40TH ACADEMIC BOARD
DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING
(SIX-SEMESTER REGULAR, SEVEN-SEMESTER SANDWICH FULL-TIME AND EIGHT SEMESTER PART-TIME)
1. CANDIDATES FOR ADMISSION
1.1 AGE LIMIT Candidates for admission into the first semester of the six-semester Regular, seven-semester
Sandwich, eight- semester Part-Time Diploma Courses and to the third semester Regular
Diploma courses under Lateral Entry shall satisfy the age limit as prescribed by the
Directorate of Technical Education.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS 1.2.1. Candidates seeking admission into Full-Time and Part-Time Diploma Courses shall be
required to have passed X standard examination of the State Board of Education, Tamil
Nadu or any other equivalent examination already recognized by the Directorate of School
Education Board, Tamilnadu with eligibility for admission to First year of Higher Secondary
School in Tamil Nadu
1.2.2.Candidates seeking admission to the Second Year (III Semester) of Regular Diploma Courses
under Lateral Entry shall be required to have passed the Higher Secondary Certificate (HSC)
Examination (Vocational) or 2 year Industrial Training Institute (ITI) Certificate Examination
after passing X Std. Examination of State Board of Education as prescribed by the Directorate
of Technical Education.
1.3 ELIGIBILITY Candidates seeking admission shall satisfy the eligibility conditions such as subjects, marks,
number of attempts etc, as prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education, Tamil Nadu.
2. DURATION OF COURSE
The duration for the Full-Time Regular Diploma Course shall be 6 consecutive semesters
and for the Sandwich Diploma Course shall be 7 consecutive semesters and spread over 3
and 3 ½ academic years respectively, and for Part-Time Diploma Course shall be 8
consecutive semesters spread over 4 academic years. Each semester shall have a minimum
duration of 15 Weeks. One academic year constitutes two semesters.
Page 2 of 260
The minimum and maximum period for completion of Diploma Courses are as given below:
Minimum Maximum
Regular Diploma Students 3 years 6 years Lateral Entry Students 2 years 5 years Sandwich Diploma Students 3½ years 6½ years Part-Time Diploma Students 4 years 7 years
3. BRANCHES OF STUDY
Candidate may be offered at the time of admission, one of the following branches of study or
such other branches of study as may be instituted from time to time.
Branch Full-Time Diploma Course Part-Time Diploma Course
Civil Engineering Regular or Sandwich Regular
Mechanical Engineering Regular or Sandwich Regular
Electrical & Electronics Engineering Regular or Sandwich Regular
Electronics&Communication
Engineering
Regular or Sandwich Regular
Computer Engineering Regular ---
Mechanical Engineering (Tool & Die) Sandwich Regular
Electronics (Robotics) Sandwich -----
4. SUBJECTS OF STUDY
The subjects of study shall include theory, practical and project work as detailed in the
Curriculum for Full-Time Regular, Sandwich and Part-Time Diploma Courses and Industrial
training for Sandwich Diploma Courses.
5. EVALUATION OF PERFORMANCE
5.1 THEORY SUBJECTS: The evaluation of students performance in each one of the theory
subjects, shall be by Continuous Assessment comprising three assessment tests, assignment,
attendance and an end-semester examination as mentioned below:
Page 3 of 260
# 3 CA Tests shall be conducted and each shall be reduced to 5 marks making a total of 15 marks.
CATEST Syllabus Portion WHEN TO CONDUCT Maximum Marks DURATION IN
HRS
TEST-1 Unit-I 4th week 50 2
TEST-2 Unit-II & III 9th week 50 2
TEST-3 Unit-IV & 50% of Unit
V
13th week 50 2
Model Exam 15th week 75 3
Question paper pattern:
Part-A - Answer all 5 one mark question - 5 x 1 = 05
Part-B - Answer any 5 out of 7 question of three marks each - 5 x 3 = 15
Part-C - Answer any 3 out of 5 question of 10 marks each - 3 x 10 = 30
* For each theory subject, at least three Assignments are to be given and the marks scored shall
be reduced to 5 marks.
** Marks for attendance shall be awarded only to candidates securing above 80% attendance
(Minimum required for completion of semesters, (vide clause 6)) i.e. 0.25 marks for each
percent above 80%.
## Model Examination of 3 hour duration for 75 marks shall be conducted during the last week of
the semester to give more End Semester Examination Orientation.
Components Marks Max. Marks
Continuous Assessment Test (CA) 25
CA Test I , II, III # 15
Assignment* 5
Attendance** 5
End-Semester Examination*** 75
Total 100
Page 4 of 260
5.2. PRACTICAL SUBJECTS: (a) For practical subject the Continuous Assessment marks shall be 25 and the End Semester Examination shall be 75. Continuous Assessment and End Semester Examination marks will be assigned as mentioned below:
$ Mid Semester Test Pattern:
It will be conducted in 8th and 9th week for 50 marks split up are given below and reduced to 10 marks:
Concept/Diagram/flowchart -10
Connection/Tabulation/Compilation -30
Result/Execution -10
@ Each Exercise shall be evaluated in Mid Semester Test pattern and reduced to 10 marks.
$$ End Semester Exam Question pattern:
End semester Exam shall be conducted in the question paper pattern as described in the detailed syllabus.
5.3 PROJECTWORK: The evaluation of Project work shall be based on Continuous Assessment consisting of two periodical Reviews during final semester and End Semester Examination consisting of written test, project report and viva-voce, demonstration and explanation.
5.4 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING: Industrial Training for Sandwich Diploma Course students will be
evaluated based on continuous assessment consisting of two periodical Reviews and End-
Semester Evaluation of Training Report and viva voce.
6. ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENT FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER
A student shall secure not less than 80% attendance during the semester for the completion of a
semester.
7. COURSE REPETITION
7.1 A student who secures less than 80% of attendance in a semester, has to repeat all the subjects of that Semester (vide clause 6) in the next academic year on Readmission.
Components Marks Maximum Marks
Continuous Assessment 25
Record - Average Mark of Expt./Exercises @ 10
Mid Semester Test $ 10
Attendance ** 5
End Semester Exam $$ 75
Total 100
Page 5 of 260
7.2 A student who has 80% or more attendance but not appeared even for any one End Semester Examination is not eligible to continue the Consequent Semester. But he/she can repeat the same semester by obtaining Readmission in the next academic Year.
8. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING IN END SEMESTER EXAMINATION A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for the end semester examination of the
current semester if he/she has satisfied the semester completion requirements (vide clause 6) and has registered for examination in all subjects of the current semester and arrears of all the previous semesters, if any.
9. SANDWICH DIPLOMA COURSE 9.1. The performance and attendance of a student of Sandwich Diploma Course during Industrial
Training has to be satisfactory to continue in the Sandwich Diploma Course, otherwise the student has to repeat the Industrial training or discontinue the Diploma Course. The Sandwich Diploma Course Industrial Training is regulated by the Apprenticeship Amendment Act 1983.
9.2. Sandwich Diploma Course students shall complete the industrial training for one year in two
spells of six months each during the course of study, first spell of Industrial Training during the fourth semester and the second spell during the seventh semester.
10. SUBJECTWISE PASSING REQUIREMENTS 10.1. For a pass in the Theory Subject, a student should secure a minimum of 30 marks out of 75
marks in the End Semester Examination and 40 marks out of 100 marks, the Aggregate of
Continuous Assessment marks and End Semester Examination marks.
10.2. For a pass in Practical Subject, a student should secure a minimum of 35 marks out of 75
marks in the End Semester Examination and 50 marks out of 100 marks, the Aggregate of
Continuous Assessment marks and End Semester Examination marks.
10.3. For a pass in the subject “Industrial Training” for Sandwich Diploma Course, a student
should secure a minimum of 25 marks out of 50 marks in the End Semester Examination and
50 marks out of 100 marks, the Aggregate of Continuous Assessment marks and End
Semester Examination marks.
10.4. For a pass in Project Work, a student should secure a minimum of 35 marks out of 75 marks
in end semester examination and 50 marks out of 100 marks, the Aggregate of Continuous
Assessment marks and end semester examination marks.
10.5. If a student fails in a subject, the Continuous Assessment Marks obtained by him/her in the
first attempt shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent attempts.
Page 6 of 260
11. DISCIPLINE AND MALPRACTICE IN THE EXAMINATION
11.1. Every student is required to be disciplined and to have decorous behavior both inside and
outside the campus and not to indulge in any activity, which will tend to bring down the
prestige of the institution.
11.2. Any act of malpractices by a student during the examinations, such as copying from the answer books of other students, possession of cell phones, written / printed matters, showing / transferring answer books, discussing with other candidates etc., notified from time to time, shall be punishable as per DOTE norms.
12. CLASSIFICATION OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES:
Classification of candidates who shall pass out the final examinations from April 2019
onwards (joined in first year in 2016-2017) shall be done as specified below.
12.1 First Class with Superlative Distinction
A candidates shall be declared to have passed in First Class with Superlative Distinction if
he/she secures not less than 75% of the marks in all the subjects and passes all the semesters
in the first appearance itself and passes all subjects within the stipulated period of study 3/
31/2 /4 years (Full time/ Sandwich/Part Time) without any break in study.
12.2 First Class with Distinction
A candidate shall be declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction if he/she secures
not less than 75% of the aggregate marks in all the semesters put together and passes all the
semesters except the I and II semester in the first appearance itself and passes all subjects
within the stipulated period of study 3/ 31/2 /4 years (Full time/ Sandwich/Part Time) without
any break in study.
12.3 First Class
A candidate shall be declared to have passed in First Class if he/ she secures not less than 60
% of the aggregate marks in all the semesters put together and passes all the subjects within
the stipulated period of study 3/ 31/2 /4 years (Full time/ Sandwich/Part Time) without any
break in study.
12.4 Second Class
All other successful candidates shall be declared to have passed in Second Class. The above
mentioned classifications are applicable for the Full Time Regular, Sandwich and Part Time
students who pass out Final Examination from April / October 2019 onwards ( joined in First
Year in 2016- 2017and Second Year Lateral entry in 2017-18)
Page 7 of 260
13. DECLARATION OF RESULTS
The results shall be declared after the approval of the marks and classification by the
Awards Committee of the institution.
14. REVALUATION
Any candidate can apply for Photocopy of his/her answer script of any Theory subject,
he/she had appeared, if he/she is not satisfied with the marks awarded to him/her in the
subject. The candidate has to fill-in the prescribed application form and remit Rs.100/- per
paper for obtaining the photocopy of the answer script within 10 days from the date of
publication of results. After going through the Answer script if the candidate desires for re-
valuation he/she has to pay a revaluation fee of Rs.400/- per paper, within 3 working days,
after receipt of the photocopy of the answer script.
The revaluation system is not applicable for Practical subjects, Project work and
Industrial Training.
15. MARK SHEET
15.1. The Mark sheet shall be issued to each student at the end of each semester, up to final
semester.
15.2. Transcript (consolidated Mark-sheet) shall be issued for the passed out student, at the end
of the course.
15.3 Course Completion Certificate, and Conduct Certificate shall be issued for all candidates at
the end of the Course.
16. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A student shall be declared eligible for the award of the Diploma if he/she has:
16.1 Registered and successfully completed all the theory and practical subjects and project
work (in the case of Full-Time Regular Diploma Course and Part-Time Diploma Courses) and
in addition two spells of industrial training in the case of Sandwich Diploma Course (vide
clause 9.2).
16.2. No dues to the institution.
17. ADDITIONAL CHANCE
Candidate will be given 6 more chances (3years) to complete the arrears after completing the
course. After exhausting all 6 chances they will be given 2 more additional chances in the
next calendar year .The minimum and maximum period for completion of Diploma Courses
are as given
Page 8 of 260
Diploma Course Minimum period
Maximum period
After over the Maximum period (Additional Chance)
Full Time 3 Years 6 Years 2 Chances in the next Calendar Year
Full Time (Lateral Entry) 2 Years 5 Years 2 Chances in the next Calendar Year
Sandwich 3 ½ Years 6 ½ Years 2 Chances in the next Calendar Year
Part Time 4 Years 7 Years 2 Chances in the next Calendar Year
18. AWARD OF DIPLOMA
The State Board of Technical Examination and Training, Department of Technical Education,
Tamilnadu awards the Diploma to the successful candidates on the recommendations of
Awards Committee of the institution.
19. BREAK OF STUDY
Students shall not be permitted to discontinue the course of study for a duration of more
than three years during any part of their course of study. However, for students for whom
continuous break in study is less than or equal to three years, prior permission of the
Chairman, Board of Examination is necessary to continue in the Diploma Course and to
appear in the examination. Such students will be awarded only Second Class.
20. DISCONTINUATION OF COURSE
Any student of first semester who has less than 80% attendance or who has 80% or more attendance but not appeared even for any one of the end semester examination is not eligible for continuing the Diploma course.
21. POWER TO MODIFY
Notwithstanding all that have been stated above the Academic Board of the
institution has the right to modify any of the above regulations from time to time.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page 9 of 260
M SCHEME CURRICULUM AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING (3 Yr Regular)
I SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 11 Communication Skills in
English
4
-
- 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 12 Engineering Mathematics-I 7 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 13 Engineering Physics-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 14 Engineering Chemistry-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 15 Engineering Physics –I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 16 Engineering Chemistry-I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 17 Engineering Graphics-I
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
8. GEM 18 Basic Computer Application
Practical
- 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 19 3 13 800
II SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max. Min. for
a pass
Max. Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 21 Engineering
Mathematics-II
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 22 Applied Mathematics 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 23 Engineering Physics-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 24 Engineering Chemistry-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 25 Communication Skills in
English Practical
- 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 26 Engineering Physics-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 27 Engineering Chemistry-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
8. GEM 28 Engineering Graphics-II
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
9. GEM 29 Work shop practice - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 14 4 17 900
T – Theory Hours Tut – Tutorial P – Practical hours
CAM - Continuous Assessment Mark ESE - End Semester Examination
ESM - End Semester Examination Mark
Page 10 of 260
III SEMESTER
SL. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM31 Electronic Devices and circuits 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM32 Electrical Circuits and instrumentation
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
3. ECM33 Analog and Digital Electronics 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM34 Electronic Devices and circuits Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. ECM35 Electrical Circuits and instrumentation Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50
AE
6. ECM36 Analog and Digital Electronics Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM37 Programming in ‘C’ Practical - - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 15 1 19 700
IV SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM41 Microcontroller 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM42 Communication Engineering 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM43 Industrial Electronics 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM44 Very Large Scale Integrated circuits (VLSI)
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
5. ECM45 Microcontroller Practical
- - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
6. ECM46 Industrial Electronics and Communication Engineering Practical
- - 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM47 Very Large Scale Integrated circuits practical
- - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 19 2 14 700
ESE - End Semester Examination ESM - End Semester Examination Mark
Page 11 of 260
V SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. EEM51 Industrial Management 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
2. ECM52 Embedded Systems 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM53 Advanced Communication Systems
5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM54 Elective - I Theory 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
5. ECM55 Embedded Systems practical - - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
6. ECM56 Advanced Communication Systems practical
- - 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. GEM57 Life and Employability Skill Practical
- - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 20 1 14 700
ECM54 Elective - I Theory ECM54.1 Digital Communication ECM54.2 Programmable Logic Control ECM54.3 Electronics System Design VI SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM61 Computer Hardware Servicing and Networking
5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM62 Automated Test System 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM63 Elective - II Theory 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
4. ECM64 Computer Hardware Servicing and Networking practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. ECM65 Automated Test System Practical - - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
6.
ECM66
Electronic Simulation Practical - - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM67 Project Work - - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 15 1 19 700
ECM63 Elective - II Theory ECM63.1 Broadcast Engineering ECM63.2 Biomedical Instrumentation and Telemedicine ECM63.3 Mobile Communication T=Theory P=Practical ESE=End Semester Examination CAM=Continuous Assessment Mark ESM= End Semester Examination Mark
Page 12 of 260
MURUGAPPA POLYTECHNIC COLLEGE
M SCHEME CURRICULUM AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION (3 1/2 Yr SANDWICH)
I SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 11 Communication Skills in
English
4
-
- 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 12 Engineering Mathematics-I 7 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 13 Engineering Physics-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 14 Engineering Chemistry-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 15 Engineering Physics –I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 16 Engineering Chemistry-I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 17 Engineering Graphics-I
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
8. GEM 18 Basic Computer Application
Practical
- 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 19 3 13 800
II SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max. Min. for
a pass
Max. Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 21 Engineering
Mathematics-II
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 22 Applied Mathematics 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 23 Engineering Physics-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 24 Engineering Chemistry-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 25 Communication Skills in
English Practical
- 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 26 Engineering Physics-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 27 Engineering Chemistry-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
8. GEM 28 Engineering Graphics-II
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
9. GEM 29 Work shop practice - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 14 4 17 900
T – Theory Hours Tut – Tutorial P – Practical hours
CAM - Continuous Assessment Mark ESE - End Semester Examination
ESM - End Semester Examination Mark
Page 13 of 260
III SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM31 Electronic Devices and circuits 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM32 Electrical Circuits and instrumentation
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
3. ECM33 Analog and Digital Electronics 5 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM34 Electronic Devices and circuits Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. ECM35 Electrical Circuits and instrumentation Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
6. ECM36 Analog and Digital Electronics Practical
- - 5 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM37 Programming in ‘C’ Practical - - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 15 1 19 700
IV SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/ Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM41 Micro controller 2 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM45 Micro controller Practical - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
3. ECM48 Industrial Training- I - - - 3 50 50 25 100 50
CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 3 1 3 300
Page 14 of 260
V SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. EEM51 Industrial Management 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
2. ECM42 Communication Engineering 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM43 Industrial Electronics 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM44 Very Large Scale Integrated circuits (VLSI)
3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
5. ECM61 Computer Hardware Servicing and Networking
4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
6. ECM46 Industrial Electronics and Communication Engineering Practical
- - 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM47 Very Large Scale Integrated circuits (VLSI)Practical
- - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
8. ECM64 Computer Hardware Servicing and Networking Practical
- - 4 3 25 75 35 100
50
CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 20 1 14 800
VI SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM52 Embedded Systems 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM53 Advanced Communication Systems
4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM54 Elective-I 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
4 ECM62 Automated Test System 3 1 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
5.
ECM55 Embedded Systems Practical - - 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
6.
ECM56 Advanced Communication Systems Practical
- - 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
7. ECM65 Automated Test System Practical
- 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
8. GEM57 Life and Employability Skill Practical
- 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 15 2 18 800
ECM54 Elective - I Theory ECM54.1 Digital Communication ECM54.2 Programmable Logic Controller ECM54.3 Electronics System Design
Page 15 of 260
VII SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM63 Elective – II Theory 3 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
2. ECM66 Electronic Simulation Practical - - 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
3. ECM67 Project Work - - 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
4. ECM74 Industrial Training-II - - - 3 50 50 25 100 50 CE
TOTAL 3 4 400
ECM63 Elective - II TheoryECM63.1 Broadcast Engineering ECM63.2 Biomedical Instrumentation and Telemedicine
ECM63.3 Mobile Communication
T=Theory P=Practical ESE=End Semester Examination CAM=Continuous Assessment Mark ESM= End Semester Examination Mark
Page 16 of 260
MURUGAPPA POLYTECHNIC COLLEGE
M SCHEME CURRICULUM AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION (4 YEAR PART TIME)
I SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
Max
.
Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 11 Communication Skills in
English
4
-
- 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 12 Engineering Mathematics-I 7 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 13 Engineering Physics-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 14 Engineering Chemistry-I 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 15 Engineering Physics –I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 16 Engineering Chemistry-I
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 17 Engineering Graphics-I
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
8. GEM 18 Basic Computer Application
Practical
- 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 19 3 13 800
II SEMESTER
S.N
O
Subject
Code
Subject Name Hours / Week ESE
Hrs
CAM ESM Total Marks Cate
gory
(BE/
CE/
AE/
DC)
T Tut. P Max. Min. for
a pass
Max. Min.
for a
pass
1. GEM 21 Engineering
Mathematics-II
4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
2. GEM 22 Applied Mathematics 4 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
3. GEM 23 Engineering Physics-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
4. GEM 24 Engineering Chemistry-II 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 BE
5. GEM 25 Communication Skills in
English Practical
- 4 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
6. GEM 26 Engineering Physics-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
7. GEM 27 Engineering Chemistry-II
Practical
- 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
8. GEM 28 Engineering Graphics-II
Practical
- 6 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
9. GEM 29 Work shop practice - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Total 14 4 17 900
T – Theory Hours Tut – Tutorial P – Practical hours
CAM - Continuous Assessment Mark ESE - End Semester Examination
ESM - End Semester Examination Mark
Page 17 of 260
III SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM31 Electronic Devices and Circuits 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM32 Electrical Circuits and Instrumentation
3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
3. GEM28 Engineering Graphics - II - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
4. GEM29 Workshop Practice Practical - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 BE
5. ECM34 Electronic Devices and circuits Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 8 1 9 500
IV SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM33 Analog and Digital Electronics 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM41 Microcontroller 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM35 Electrical Circuits and instrumentation Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
4. ECM36 Analog and Digital Electronics Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. ECM45 Microcontroller Practical - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 8 1 9 500
Page 18 of 260
V SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM42 Communication Engineering 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM43 Industrial Electronics 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. EEM51 Industrial Management 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 AE
4. ECM46 Industrial Electronics and Communication Engineering Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. GEM57 Life and Employability Skills Practical
- - 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 13 5 500
VI SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM44 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits (VLSI)
3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM53 Advanced Communication Systems
4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM37 Programming in ‘C’ Practical - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 AE
4. ECM47 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits (VLSI) Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50
CE
5. ECM56 Advanced Communication Systems Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 8 1 9 500
Page 19 of 260
VII SEMESTER
Sl. No.
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T Tut P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM54 Elective - I Theory
4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
2.
ECM52 Embedded Systems 3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
3. ECM62 Automated Test System
3 1 - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
4. ECM55 Embedded Systems Practical
- - 3 3 25 50 25 100 50 CE
5. ECM65 Automated Test System Practical
- - 2 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 11 2 5 500
ECM54 Elective - I Theory ECM54.1 Digital Communication ECM54.2 Programmable Logic Control ECM54.3 Electronics System Design VIII SEMESTER
Sl. No
Subject code
Subject Name
Hours/Week
ESE Hrs.
CAM
ESM Total Marks Category (BE/CE/ AE/DC)
T P Max Min for a pass
Max Min for a pass
1. ECM61 Computer Hardware Servicing and Networking
4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 CE
2. ECM63 Elective - II Theory 4 - - 3 25 75 30 100 40 DC
3. ECM64 Computer Hardware Servicing and Network practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
4. ECM66
Electronic Simulation Practical
- - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
5. ECM67 Project Work - - 3 3 25 75 35 100 50 CE
Library/Seminar 1
TOTAL 9 9 500
ECM 63 Elective - II Theory ECM 63.1 Broadcast Engineering ECM63.2 Biomedical Instrumentation and Telemedicine ECM 63.3 Mobile Communications T=Theory P=Practical ESE=End Semester Examination CAM=Continuous Assessment Mark ESM= End Semester Examination Mark
BE 17 37.8
CE 21 46.7
AE 5 11.1
DC 2 4.4
100
BE – Basic Engineering CE – Core Engineering AE – Applied Engineering DC – Diversified Courses
Page 20 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : I Subject Code & Name: GEM11 COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN ENGLISH
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name
Instructions Examination
GEM 11
Communication skills in English
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration Continuous
Assessment End
Semester Total
4 60 25 75 100 3Hrs.
Topics & Allocation of Hours:
RATIONALE: In the current glob
alized environment there is a clear necessity for effective English Communication skills for Diploma students. The English language has become a major medium for communication across borders globally. To be successful in any field one need to know and understand how to communicate effectively. Communication is the most important skill required to professional practice in the global arena. At the end of the course the student will be able to communicate well both verbally and in writing. Many jobs require strong communication skills. Students with improved communication skills usually enjoy better interpersonal relationships across different employment sectors throughout their working life.
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Topic Content Learning Outcomes Contact Hrs.
I
Grammar
1) Pronunciation 2) Plurals 3)Naming words 4) Adjectives 5) Tense forms 6) Preposition 7) Articles
*Distinguish the pronunciation of past tense & plural endings * Identify nouns & verbs * Recognize and use adjectives and prepositions in speech and writing *Differentiate tense forms
12
Unit Topics Hours
I Grammar 12
II Grammar 12
III Grammar 12
IV Composition 10
V Composition 10
Total 60
Page 21 of 260
II Grammar
1) Spelling 2)Punctuation 3)Conversion 4)Lexical sets 5) Action words 6) Active/passive form.
* Recognize and spell the words * Use capitals, commas and necessary punctuation. * Convert words into other forms * Build and expand vocabulary use *Recognize& Distinguish active/passive forms
12
III Grammar
1)Direct & Indirect speech 2)Question tag 3) Prefixes 4) Suffixes 5)Degrees of comparison, 6) Idioms & Phrases 7)Rearranging jumbled words, 8) Giving directions.
*Convert from direct to indirect *Add suitable question tags *Use prefixes and suffixes appropriately *Sort positive, comparative and superlative forms * Identify and rearrange the words into sentences * Write directions for the given road map
12
IV Composition
1)Comprehension, 2)Personal Letters, 3)Official Letters, 4) Short report writing 5) Verbal to visual comprehension.
*Comprehend, interpret and analyze passage *Identify and compose personal letters *Recognize& use appropriate structure and write letters *Recognize structure and use passive forms * Organize& interpret the text into visual
10
V Composition
1)Description of events 2)Writing about personal experiences 3)Writing short message 4)Advertisement writing 5) Linkers 6) Hints Development.
*Organize & write paragraph *Write messages for given contexts *Design an advertisement using relevant vocabulary *Organize paragraph using linkers * Develop hints by framing sentences
10
TEXT BOOK: 1. “Communication Skills in English”, Ms.S.Rajalakshmi and Ms.S.Anandhi, Saravana Publishers. REFERENCE BOOK: 1. Communication English I&II Govt. Of Tamil Nadu, Text Book DOTE. 2. Ramaya.Y ,“A Hand Book Of Spelling”, Indian Institute of Publishing, Chennai. 3. Wren&Martin, ’High School English Grammar & Composition, S.Chand & Co., Ltd
Page 22 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C101.1
Identify the sounds in a word, change the singular to plural, find the naming words and adjectives in a sentence and choose the appropriate preposition and articles
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
C101.2
Matching Idioms and phrases , arrange jumbled words in proper order, form words from prefix and suffix, explain the given road map, label the degrees in a sentence, transform the direct sentence into indirect and add question tag.
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
C101.3
Transform the words into other forms, Analyse the lexical sets and give related words, find the action words and voices in the sentence, check the given spelling and apply proper punctuation
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
C101.4
Read independently the given passage and answer the questions, write both personal and impersonal letter in the appropriate structure, demonstrate the given process and transform the verbal to visual.
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
C101.5
Assume the situation and explain the experience, Imagine the object, event and write a paragraph, Convey the information in short message.
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
C101.6
Imagine and create advertisement for the given information, use linkers to connect the sentence and develop hints into a paragraph
- - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
Total - - - - - - - - 18 12 - 6 - 6
Ave - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - 1
Page 23 of 260
GEM11: COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN ENGLISH
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
TIME: 3 Hrs. Max.Marks:75
I. Answer any TEN of the following questions. (2x10=20) 1. Write 2 words related to your ‘Class Room’. 2. Identify two action words in the following sentences. He gets back home at 5 o’clock, takes bath and relaxes a while. 3. Identify and write as active/passive sentence against each of the following. a. The results will announced soon. b. I have sent an email to my friend. 4. Covert the dialogue into reported speech. Boy: ‘What is your father?’ Girl: ‘My father is a teacher’ 5. Supply suitable tags for the following sentences. a. I am doing my work. b. Ravi wrote the exam. 6. Write suitable prefixes for the following words. a. Possible b.Connect c. Necessary d. Relevant 7. Write suitable Suffixes for the following words. a. able b. beauty c. encourage d. comfort 8. Identify the Degrees of Comparison and write as Positive degree/Comparative Degree/Superlative degree for the following sentences. a. The Internet is the fastest mode of communication. b. Helicopters do not fly as fast as airplanes. 9. Match the following idioms/phrases with their relevant meaning. a.for the sake of - want of b. in need of - for the benefit c. on the contrary -joys and sorrows d. ups and downs -nevertheless 10. Rearrange the jumbled words into meaningful sentences. a. my,never,I,time,wasted b. is,the very,woman,selfish
Page 24 of 260
11. Give two instructions to Raja to reach the park using imperative form.
II. Answer any EIGHT of the following questions. (5x3=24) 1. Identify short and long sounds and write short or long next to each word. a. dip b. meet c. sleep d. fill e. sit f) mutt 2. Fill in the blanks with plural form of the word given in the bracket. a. How many ………(day) will you stay in Chennai? b. He Solved all the ……..(problem) himself. c. Where are the ……. (child)? 3. Identify three naming words in the following sentence. The professor is delivering a lecture on ‘first aid ’in the class. 4. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate adjective given in brackets. a. I like her ………… attitude with everybody. (friend/ friendly) b. An ………. Man always has a special place in every society. (honest /honesty) c. The exam questions were quite…….. this time.(difficulty/difficult) 5. Identify the tense forms used in the following sentences. a. I play cricket on Sunday. b. We are learning English Grammar at present. c. They have been building this house for the past four years. 6. Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions. a. They replied…… my e-mail last week. (for/to) b. My friend presented me ……… a pen.(by/with) c. He was driving a car….. 60 km per hour. (with/by) 7. Fill in the blanks with suitable articles in the following sentences. a. The dog is ……. Faithful animal. b. I hope you know ……. Latest news. c. Who is ….. tallest boy in the class? 8. Correct the spelling. a. michine b) modherland c)rekwist 9. Punctuate and use capital letters wherever necessary. a. jane said to john my facourite leader is mahatma gandhi b. new delhi is the capital of india c. i am waiting for my friend joseph
Mr Raja
Patel Road
Railway
Station
2nd Cut 1st Cut Surya
Nagar
Page 25 of 260
10. Convert the following Nouns into verbs. a. conductor b.teacher c. formation III. Answer all the following questions. ( 3x5=15 )
Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions that follows. Addressing the members of Madras management Association after receiving the
MMA Amalgamation,Business Leadership Award 2014. Ratan Tata said, “the corporate world has to exist by side, complement each other and move together to make the country rise.” Ratan Tata, Chairman-Emeritus of Tata Sons on Tuesday, called for better co-operation and collaboration within the corporate sector.Mr.Tata said that industries and government should collaborate in a proactive manner for growth and prosperity.
QUESTIONS: 1. a.Who is Ratan Tata? b. What is MMA? c. What Award was given to him? d. Whom did he address? e. What is his suggestion to the Government and Industries? 2. Write a short report of the process of preparing lemon juice. 3. Write a letter to your friend inviting him/her to come to your place for a group study. (or) Write a letter to M/s Phoenix Computers placing an order for 10 computers with specifications. IV. Answer any FOUR of the following questions. (4x4=16)
1. Describe a ‘Railway Platform’ in 5 sentences
2. Write your experience on the day when your SSLC results were announced in 5 sentences.
3. Write a short message to your friend, wishing him success in the examination.
4. Create Advertisement for a book exhibition by M/s Majestic Book House. V. Fill up the blanks by choosing the suitable linkers given in brackets. (then, thus, and, because, so)
Yesterday I was working in my office. Without break for tea, even after 5 pm. I felt so tired ______of it. _______ I went to a hotel and had a cup of tea. _________I went for a walk_______ later resumed my work in the office. _______ Relaxation helps us to refresh ourselves. VI. Develop the following hints into a passage of about 50 words
A farmer - owned a goose - goose laid golden eggs everyday - greedy farmer - wanted all golden eggs at once - killed the goose - no golden eggs – disappointed - learnt a good lesson-moral.
Page 26 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code &Name: GEM12 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name
Instructions Examination
GEM 12Engineering Mathematics I
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration
in Hrs Continuous Assessmen
t
End Semester
Total
8 120 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No. Topics Hours
I Algebra – Determinants, Matrices and Binomial Theorem 24
II Complex Numbers 24
III Trigonometry 24
IV Differential Calculus – I 24
V Differential Calculus – II 24
Total 120
Rationale:
This subject being a branch of “Logic” is classified as one of the basic sciences and intends
to teach students, basic facts, concepts and principles of mathematics as a tool to analyze
Engineering problems. Mathematics lay down foundation for understanding core technology
subjects.
Page 27 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name Of Topics Hours
I
ALGEBRA 1.1 DETERMINANTS Definition and expansion of determinants of order 2 and 3. Properties of determinants – simple problems. Solution of simultaneous equations using Cramer’s rule (in 3 unknowns) – simple problems. 1.2 MATRICES Definition – Singular Matrix, Non-singular Matrix, Adjoint of a matrix and Inverse of a matrix up to 3 x 3 only. Simple problems. Definition- Rank of a matrix. Finding Rank of a matrix by determinant method (matrix of order 3 x 4) Simple problems. 1.3 BINOMIAL THEOREM Definition of Factorial notation – Definition of Permutation and Combinations – values of nPr and nCr (results only) [not for examination]. Binomial theorem for positive integral index (statement only) - Expansion – Finding of general term, middle term, coefficient of xn and term independent of x- Simple problems. Binomial theorem for rational index upto 3 (statement only), Expansions only upto 3 for negative integers.
8
8
8
II
COMPLEX NUMBERS 2.1 ALGEBRA OF COMPLEX NUMBERS Definition – Real and imaginary parts, Conjugates, Modulus and amplitude form, Polar form of a complex number, multiplication and division of complex numbers (geometrical proof not needed) – Simple problems. Argand Diagram – Collinear points, four points forming square, rectangle, rhombus and parallelogram only – simple problems. 2.2 DEMOIVER’S THEOREM Demoivre’s Theorem (statement only) - related simple problems. 2.3 ROOTS OF COMPLEX NUMBERS Finding the nth roots of unity– solving equation of the form xn 1 =0 where n 8 – simple problems.
8
8
8
III
TRIGONOMENTRY 3.1 COMPOUND ANGLES
Expansion of sin(A B) , cos(A B) and tan(A B) [without proof]. Problems using above
expansions. 3.2 MULTIPLE ANGLES Trigonometrical ratios of multiple angles of 2A and 3A and sub multiple angles. Simple problems. 3.3 SUM AND PRODUCT FORMULAE Trigonometrical ratios of sum and product formulae. Simple problems. – Standard Identities – simple problems.
8
8
8
Page 28 of 260
IV
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS –I 4.1 LIMITS Definition of Limits. Problems using the following results:
, (ii)
( in radians) (results only) – Simple problems.
4.2 DIFFERENTIATION Definition – Differentiation of , , , , , , , , ,
, uv, uvw, u/v ( v 0) (results only). Simple problems using the above results.
4.3 DIFFERENTIATION METHODS: Differentiation of function of functions (chain rule), Inverse Trigonometric functions and implicit functions - Simple problems.
8
8
8
V
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS –II 5.1 SUCCESSIVE DIFFERENTIATION Successive differentiation up to second order (Parametric form not included). Definition of differential equation, order and degree, formation of differential equation. Simple problems. 5.2 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIATION Definition – Partial differentiation of two variables up to second order only -Simple problems. 5.3 EULER’S THEOREM Definition – Homogeneous function – Euler’s theorem (statement only) – simple problems.
8
8
8
Text Book:
1. Engineering Mathematics I For Polytechnic College , E.Geethalakshmi and M. Narayana
Vadivoo, Saravana Publishers.
Reference Book:
1. Engineering Mathematics I and II –E.Geethalakshmi and M. Narayana Vadivoo, Saravana Publishers.
2. Mathematics for Higher Secondary – I year and II year (Tamil Nadu Text Book Corporation) 3. Engineering Mathematics – Dr.M.K.Venkatraman, National Publishing Co, Chennai. 4. Engineering Mathematics – Dr.P.Kandasamy& Others. S.Chand& Co Ltd, New Delhi.
Page 29 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C102.1
Solve simultaneous equation
& simple problems using
determinants & properties of
determinant respectively;
and to find Transpose of a
matrix, Adjoint matrix,
Inverse matrix and rank of
matrix using Algebra of
matrices.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 1 1
C102.2
Find General term, middle
term, Particular term,
coefficient of x^n,
Independent term and
approximation using
binomial theorem.
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1
C102.3
Carry out the concept of
complex numbers to find
simple problems on algebra
of complex numbers; Using
Demoivre’s theorem find the
simple problems of roots of
unity and demoivre’s
theorem related problems.
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1
C102.4
Apply trigonometric
formulae to work out simple
problems of compound
angles, multiple (2A&3A)
and sub multiple angles; Use
sum and product formulae &
Standard Identities to solve
simple problems.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 1 1
C102.5
Determine the solution of
simple problems using basic
limits and find the
differentiation of simple
problem using basic
formulas and find the
differentiation of implicit
function, Inverse
trigonometric function using
the concept of
differentiation.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 1 1
C102.6
Use the concept of
successive differentiation to
form the differential
equation and Identify the
method of Partial
Differentiation to verify
partial differential equation
using Euler’s theorem.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 1 1
Total 18 18 1 - - - - - - - 7 7 6 6
Ave 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1.75 1.75 1 1
Page 30 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time : 3hrs Max. Marks : 75
Subject Code and Name : GEM12 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART –A ( 1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – B ( 3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – C (10 marks each).
PART-A (1x10=10)
1. Solve for x;
2. Find the first three terms in the expansion
3. Find the distance between the complex numbers 1+i and 3-2i
4. Simplify:
5. If tanA= ½ tanB=1/3 find tan(A+B)
6. Prove that
7. Evaluate:
8. Find if y=
9. Find the order and degree of
10. State Euler’s theorem.
PART-B (5x3=15 )
UNIT I
11. Prove that . [OR]
12. Find the 10th term in
UNIT II
13. Find the modulus and amplitude of [OR]
14. If a=cosα +isinα , b= cosβ +isinβ then prove that sin(α+β) =
UNIT III
15.If sinθ = ½ find sin3θ [OR] 16.Prove that cos10°+cos70° = √3 cos 40°
UNIT IV
Page 31 of 260
17.Find if y= [OR]
18.Find if y=log(secx+tanx)
UNIT V
19.If y= Acos5x +Bsin5x then show that +25y=0 [OR]
20.Find & if u=x2 siny + y2sinx
PART-C (5x10=50)
UNIT I
21.a. Solve the equations x-2y-z=-6, 3x+y+2z=11 and 2x-3y+2z=2 using Cramer’s Rule.
b. Find the inverse of the matrix
[OR]
22. a. Find the Rank of the matrix
b. Find the term independent of x in the expansion
UNIT II
23. a. Find the real and imaginary parts of
b. Prove that the points 2-2i, 8+4i, 5+7i and -1+i form a rectangle in argand diagram.
[OR]
24.a. Simplify using Demoivre’s theorem:
b. Solve: x4 - 1 =0
UNIT-III
25.a. If A & B be acute angles and if sinA= sinB = then prove that A+B =
b. Prove that -
[OR]
26.a. If A+B+C= π then prove that sin2A+sin2B+sin2C = 4sinAsinBsinC
b. Prove that
Page 32 of 260
UNIT - IV
27.a. Evaluate: (i) (ii)
b. Find if (i) y= x5 +3x2 +5logx +2ex (ii) y=(3x2-5x+2)sinx
[OR]
28. a. Find if (i) y= (ii) y=xexlogx
b. Find if (i) y= (ii) xy=c2
UNIT – V
29.a. If y =
b. If y=x2cosx then prove that x2y2-4xy1+(x2+6)=0 [OR]
30.a. If u=2x3+2y3 find and
b. If u= then show that x
Page 33 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code& Name: GEM 13 ENGINEERING PHYSICS - I
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester
Marks
Duration in
Hrs Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester Total
GEM 13 Engineering
Physics- I 5 75 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit Topics Hours
I S I Units and Statics 15
II Properties of Matter 15
III Dynamics – I 15
IV Dynamics – II 15
V Sound And Magnetism 15
Total 75
RATIONALE:
The exponential growth of Engineering and Technology has benefited the mankind with
extreme sophistication and comfort. To sustain this development, continuous research and
development should take place not only in Engineering and Technology but also in Basic Science
such as Physics. The various divisions of Physics like Optics, Acoustics, Dynamics, Semiconductor
Physics, Surface Physics, Nuclear Physics, Energy Studies, Materials Science, etc provide the
Foundation by enlightening the Fundamental facts, Principles, Laws and Correct sequence of
events to develop the Engineering and Technology field for the prosperity of human beings.
Page 34 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit NAME OF THE TOPIC Hours
I
S I UNITS AND STATICS 1.1 UNITS AND MEASUREMENT Unit-Definition-Fundamental Quantities-Definition-Seven fundamental quantities; their SI units and symbol for the units-Dimensional formula for length, mass and time -Supplementary quantities-plane angle and solid angle; their SI units and symbol for the units. Derived physical quantities-Definition-SI units, symbol for the units and derivation of dimensional formula for area, volume, density, velocity, momentum, acceleration, force, impulse, work or energy and power. Conventions followed in SI-Multiples & sub-multiples and prefixes of units. 1.2 STATICS Scalar and vector quantities – Definitions and examples – Concurrent forces and coplanar forces – Definition - Resolution of a vector into two perpendicular components- Resultant and equilibrant – Definitions- Parallelogram law of forces- statement- Expressions for magnitude and direction of the resultant of two forces acting at a point with an acute angle between them - Lami’s theorem- Statement and explanation- Experimental verification of parallelogram law of forces and Lami’s theorem. Simple problems based on expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant. Moment of a force- Clockwise and anti-clockwise moments - Principle of moments- Couple – Torque acting due to a couple – Experimental determination of mass of the given body using principle of moments.
6
9
II
PROPERTIES OF MATTER 2.1 ELASTICITY Elastic and plastic bodies – Definition - stress, strain - Definitions – Hooke’s law –statement - three types of strain– Elastic and plastic limit – Elastic behavior of a material, stress- strain curve , elastic range, elastic limit, yield point, plastic limit and breaking point - Young’s modulus, Bulk modulus, Rigidity modulus and Poisson’s ratio – Definitions - Uniform and non uniform bending of beams- Explanation. Simple problems based on stress, strain and Young’s modulus. 2.2 VISCOSITY Viscosity – Definition - Coefficient of viscosity- Definition, SI unit and dimensional formula - Stream line flow, turbulent flow-Explanation - Critical velocity –Definition- Reynolds number - Experimental comparison of coefficient of viscosity of two low viscous liquids – Terminal velocity – Definition – Experimental determination of coefficient of viscosity of a high viscous liquid by Stokes’ method – Practical applications of viscosity. 2.3 SURFACE TENSION Surface tension & angle of contact- Definitions -Explanation for capillary rise and dip - Expression for surface tension of a liquid by capillary rise method - Experimental determination of surface tension of water by capillary rise method – Practical applications of capillarity. Simple problems based on expression for surface tension.
5
5
5
Page 35 of 260
III
DYNAMICS – I 3.1. PROJECTILE MOTION Introduction – Newton’s Laws of motion – Fundamental Equations of motion for objects – horizontal motion – falling freely – thrown vertically upwards. Projectile motion, angle of projection, trajectory, maximum height, time of flight, and horizontal range – Definitions - Expressions for maximum height, time of flight and horizontal range – Condition for getting the maximum range of the projectile- Derivation of the equation to show that the trajectory of the projectile is a parabola. Simple problems based on expressions for maximum height, time of flight and horizontal range. 3.2 CIRCULAR MOTION Circular motion, angular velocity, period and frequency of revolutions– Definitions – Relation between linear velocity and angular velocity – Relation between angular velocity, period and frequency – Normal acceleration, centripetal force and centrifugal force – Definitions – Expressions for normal acceleration and centripetal force. Simple problems based on expression for centripetal force. 3.3 APPLICATION OF CIRCULAR MOTION Banking of curved paths – Angle of banking – Definition – Expression for the angle of banking of a curved path. tan θ = v 2 / (r g) Simple problems based on expression for angle of banking.
6
5
4
IV
DYNAMICS – II 4.1 ROTATIONAL MOTION OF RIGID BODIES Rigid body – Definition - Moment of inertia of a particle about an axis, moment of inertia of a rigid body about an axis – expressions – Radius of gyration – Definition – Expression for the kinetic energy of a rotating rigid body about an axis – Angular momentum – Definition – Expression for the angular momentum of a rotating rigid body about an axis – Law of conservation of angular momentum – Examples. 4.2 GRAVITATION Newton’s laws of gravitation – Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth –Difference between mass and weight of a body – Expression for variation of acceleration due to gravity with altitude – Concept of weightlessness. 4.3 SATELLITES Satellites – Natural and artificial – Escape velocity and orbital velocity – Definitions – Expression for escape velocity – Expressions for orbital velocity and period of revolution of a satellite around earth – Geo-stationary and polar satellites – Uses of artificial satellites. Simple problems based on expressions for escape velocity, orbital velocity and period of revolution.
6
4
5
SOUND AND MAGNETISM 5.1 SOUND Wave motion – Introduction and definition – Progressive waves, longitudinal and transverse waves – Examples and comparison –Amplitude, wave length, period and frequency of a wave – Definitions - Relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave - Stationary or standing waves. Vibrations - Free & forced vibrations and resonance – definitions and examples –Laws of transverse vibrations of a stretched string – Sonometer
9
Page 36 of 260
V – Experimental determination of frequency of a tuning fork. Acoustics of buildings – Echo – Reverberation, Reverberation time Sabine’s formula for reverberation time(no derivation) - Coefficient of absorption of sound energy - Noise pollution. Simple problems based on expression for frequency of vibration. 5.2 MAGNETISM Coulomb’s laws of magnetism – Pole strength and unit pole – Definitions – Magnetic moment, intensity of magnetization, hysteresis, saturation, retentivity and coercivity – Definitions - Method of drawing hysteresis loop of a specimen using a solenoid – Uses of Hysteresis loop. Simple problem based on intensity of magnetization.
6
Text Book : 1) Higher secondary Physics – First year – Volume I & II – Tamil Nadu text book Corporation, Chennai. 2) Anwar Kamal - Intermediate physics – Volume I & II– Foundation books PrivateLtd. 3) P.Indira&M.Eswari-Engineering physics I –Saravana publishers. Reference Book: 1) Resnick and Haliday -- Physics –– Wisley Toppan publishers – England 2) B.L.Theraja- Engineering Physics –– S. Chand Publishers, New Delhi. 3) R.L. Saighal& H.R. Sarna -- A text book of sound –– S. Chand & Co., New Delhi . 4) Narayana Kurup --Mechanics –– S. Chand Publishers, New Delhi. 5) Srivatsava – Electricity and Magnetism - S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
Page 37 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C103.1
Solve simple problem for magnitude
and direction of resultant with the
fundamental law’s like
parallelogram law of forces, Lami’s
theorem and SI units.
3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
C103.2
Carryout and solve simple problem
of elasticity, viscosity and surface
tension with applications of basic
law’s of properties of matter.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
C103.3
Use the concept of projectile
motion and circular motion with
applications of circular motion in
mechanics
3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
C103.4 Interpret the basic laws of
gravitation, rotational motion and to
study the application of satellites.
2 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 1 - -
C103.5
Employ simple problem for
frequency of vibration with the
basic parameters of sound and
Acoustics of buildings.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 - - -
C103.6 Apply the basics of magnetism in
method of drawing hysteresis loop
and selection of magnetic material.
3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 - 2
Total 17 15 16 - - - - - - - 6 4 - 2
Ave
2.8 2.5 2.6 - - - - - - - 1.5 1.33 - 2
Page 38 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER Time : 3hrs Max. Marks : 75
Subject Code and Name: GEM 13: ENGINEERING PHYSICS – I
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART –A ( 1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – C (10 marks each).
Part-A (1x10=10)
1. Define fundamental quantities. 2. Give the SI units for Impulse and work. 3. Define coefficient of viscosity. 4. Define angle of contact. 5. Define angle of projection. 6. Define normal acceleration. 7. Define radius of gyration. 8. Define angular momentum. 9. Define reverberation time. 10. Define intensity of magnetization. Part–B (3x5 = 15)
UNIT – I
11. The resultant of two equal forces inclined to each other at 90 is 10√2 N. Find the component Forces. [OR] 12. Describe the experiment to determine the mass of the given body using principle of moments. UNIT – II 13. Distinguish between stream line motion and turbulent motion. [OR] 14. Write a note on practical applications of viscosity. UNIT – III 15. Derive the relation between angular velocity and linear velocity. [OR] 16. Explain centripetal force and centrifugal force. UNIT – IV 17. Derive an expression for the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth. [OR] 18. Give any four uses of artificial satellites.
Page 39 of 260
UNIT – V 19. The density of sonometer wire of radius 0.25mm is 7800 kg m-3. find the linear density of the
wire [OR] 20. The length, breadth and thickness of a bar magnet are 200mm, 15mm and 10mm respectively.
It its magnetic moment is 7.5 x 10¯6 Am2, calculate the intensity of magnetization. Part – C (10x5=50)
UNIT – I
21. Write the conventions to be followed in SI units [OR] 22. Describe the experiment to verify parallelogram law of forces. UNIT – II 23. A wire of length 10m and area of cross section 1.2 cm2 elongates by 1.6 cm when 5 kg is Suspended from it. Calculate (i) Stress (ii) strain and (iii) Young’s modulus of the wire (g=9.81 ms-2) [OR] 24.Derive an expression for the surface tension of a liquid in the case of capillary rise. UNIT – III 25.Prove that the path of projectile is a parabola. [OR] 26. Derive an expression for the angle of banking of a curved path. UNIT – IV 27. Derive an expression for kinetic energy of a rigid body rotating about an axis. [OR] 28. Derive the expressions for the orbital velocity and period of revolution of a satellite. UNIT – V 29. Write a note on acoustics of buildings. [OR] 30. Describe the method of drawing hysteresis loop of a specimen using a solenoid.
******
Page 40 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : I Subject Code &Name : GEM 14 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY- I
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code &Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester
Marks
Duration
in Hours Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester Total
GEM 14 Engineering
Chemistry- I 5 75 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit Topics Hrs
I Atomic Structure, Molecular mass, Acids and Bases and pH scale. 15
II Solutions, Colloids, Nano –Particles 15
III Technology of Water, Catalysis, Glass 15
IV Electro chemistry, Energy Sources, Photochemistry 15
V Corrosion, Methods of Prevention of corrosion, Organic coatings 15
Total 75
RATIONALE:
The subject Engineering Chemistry creates foundation for understanding basic concepts of
chemistry and its effects on Engineering Materials. Engineering Chemistry also imparts knowledge
of properties of materials and protecting them from corrosion and selecting right types of
materials used in various fields of Engineering and Industry.
Page 41 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topics Hours
I
ATOMIC STRUCTURE, MOLECULAR MASS, ACIDS AND BASES AND pH SCALE 1.1 ATOMIC STRUCTURE Atom-Definition-Fundamental particles of Atom-their Mass, charge and location- -Atomic number and Mass number-Definition-Isotopes and Isobars- Definition with suitable examples-Formation of cation and anion by electronic concept of oxidation and reduction-Octet rule- Formation of electrovalent compound (NaCl)-Formation of covalent compound (NH3 ). 1.2 MOLECULAR MASS Molecule - Molecular formula - Molecular Mass – Mole – Definition - Simple calculations - Avogadro’s Hypothesis Application - Relationship between Molecular Mass and Vapour Density - Avogadro’s Number – Definition - Simple Problems. 1.3 ACIDS & BASES and pH SCALE Theories of Acids and Bases – Arrehenius Theory – Lowry Bronsted Theory – Lewis Theory – Advantages of Lewis theory –Definition of pH and pOH – Numerical problems – Indicators – Acid-base concept of indicators (Basic ideas) – Buffer Solution – Definition – Types and examples – Application of pH control in industries .
5
5
5
II
SOLUTIONS, COLLOIDS, NANO-PARTICLES 2.1. SOLUTIONS Definition – Methods of Expressing Concentrations of solutions: Percentage by mass and volume, Molarity, Molality, Mole-fraction and Normality – Simple numerical problems. 2.2 COLLOIDS True solutions and colloidal solutions - Definition – Differences between true and colloidal solutions –Types of Colloidal solutions – Sols – Lyophillic and Lyophobic sols and differences between them – Properties – Tyndall Effect, Brownian Movement, Electrophoresis and Coagulation – Industrial applications – Smoke precipitation (Cottrell’s Method), Purification of drinking water, Cleaning action of soap, Disposal of sewage and Tanning of leather. 2.3NANO-PARTICLES Definition-Importance of Nano particles-Area of application-Medicine, Electronics and Biomaterials.
7
6
2
TECHNOLOGY OF WATER, CATALYSIS, GLASS 3.1 TECHNOLOGY OF WATER Sources – depletion of underground water - reasons – Rainwater harvesting (Basic ideas) – advantages – hard and soft water – Hardness of water - carbonate, non-carbonate hardness – methods of expressing hardness – mg/litre, ppm – simple problems – Estimation of total hardness by EDTA method – problems involving total, carbonate, non-carbonate hardness in ppm – softening of hard water – Ion-exchange method, Reverse Osmosis method – Municipal water supply – purification (sedimentation, filtration and sterilization) – Disadvantages of hard water in boilers – Scale formation, Corrosion of boiler metal,
10
Page 42 of 260
III Caustic Embitterment – Priming and Foaming. 3.2 CATALYSIS Catalyst- positive catalyst-Negative Catalyst- Definition-Types of catalysis- Homogeneous and Heterogeneous- promoter-catalyst poison-Definition- Characteristics of a catalyst- Industrial applications of catalyst. 3.3 GLASS Definition- Manufacture of Glass-varieties of Glass-Optical Glass, Windshield Glass and photo chromatic Glass.
3
2
IV
ELECTROCHEMISTRY, ENERGYSOURCES AND PHOTOCHEMISTRY 4.1 ELECTROCHEMISTRY Electrolytes – Differences between metal and electrolyte conduction - Strong and weak electrolytes – Definition – examples – Electrolysis – definition – mechanism – Industrial applications of electrolysis –electroplating –preparation of surface – factors affecting the stability of the coating – Chrome plating – Electroless plating – definition – advantages over electroplating – applications of Electroless plating. 4.2 ENERGY SOURCES Primary, Secondary and fuel batteries – Primary battery – definition and example – Dry cell – construction and working – Secondary battery - definition and example – Lead acid storage cell – construction and working – Nickel/Cadmium battery - construction and working – Fuel cell - definition and example – H2/O2 fuel cell (green cell) –Non conventional Energy sources- Solar cells – Definition-principle, construction, working and uses. 4.3 PHOTOCHEMISTRY Introduction – important terms- charge transfer, electronic energy migration, emission, excited state, frequency, ground state, fluorescence, Phosphorescence, chemiluminescence.
7
6
2
V
CORROSION, METHODS OF PREVENTION OF CORROSION, ORGANIC COATINGS 5.1 CORROSION Definition –types – Theories of corrosion – Galvanic cell formation theory – Differential aeration theory – Factors influencing rate of corrosion. 5.2 METHODS OF PREVENTION OF CORROSION Control of environment – Alloying, Surface coating – Metal coating – Electroplating, Galvanisation and Tinning – Inorganic coating – Anodising and Phosphating – Cathodic protection – Sacrificial anode and Impressed Voltage methods. 5.3 ORGANIC COATINGS Paints – definition – components of paints and their functions – Varnish – Definition – types – preparation of oil varnish – Difference between paint & varnish – special paints – Luminescent, heat resistant, fire retardant, Anti – fouling paints – cement paint, aluminium paint & distemper.
5
5
5
Page 43 of 260
Text Book:
Engineering Chemistry I for Polytechnic college-K.Rajalakshmi&T.Kanmani – Saravana Publishers.
Reference Books
1. Soni PL - Inorganic chemistry – Sultan Chand & sons. 2. Soni PL - Organic chemistry - Sultan Chand & sons. 3. Jain & Jain - Engineering chemistry - Dhanpat rai & co 4. Uppal - Engineering chemistry - Khanna publishers 5. Dara .S.S - Environmental chemistry & Pollution control - S.Chand& co 6. Tripathy .S.N - Environmental Pollution - Sunakar panda – Vrinda Publication 7. Rain water Harvesting-hand book by Chennai Metro Water
Page 44 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C104.1
Explain the fundamental particles of the atom, molecule, molecular mass, equivalent mass and solve simple problems based on the knowledge of Avogadro's hypothesis and its applications.
2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
C104.2
Illustrate the different types of chemical bonding like ionic and covalent, retrieve the knowledge of the different theories of acids and bases and the significance of pH in industries
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 1 - -
C104.3
Summarize the various methods of expressing concentration of solutions and solve simple problems, classify the colloids, compute the properties of colloids and carry out their various applications in day to day life, implement the applications of nano particles in medicine and electronics.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 - - -
C104.4
Infer the importance of ground water potential, rain water harvesting, hardness of water and the various softening processes, calculate numerical problems, classify the catalysts, list out the characters and industrial applications of catalysts, explain the manufacture and types of glass.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 - -
C104.5
Compare and distinguish metallic and electrolytic conduction, describe the processes of electrolysis and electroless plating with industrial applications and paraphrase the various renewable energy sources with the construction and working of various cells. Generalize the significance of photochemical reactions, infer the renewable energy sources and to outline the significance of photochemistry.
2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 - 2
C104.6
Interpret the process of corrosion with the working of galvanic and concentration cells, categorise the theories of corrosion and to execute the various methods of prevention, Indicate the importance of organic coatings like paint and varnish.
2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 - -
Total 15 15 15 14 - - - - - - 4 5 - 2
Ave 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.3 - - - - - - 1.33 1.25 - 2
Page 45 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time : 3hrs Max. Marks : 75
Subject Code and Name : GEM 14 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY I
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART –A ( 1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – B ( 3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – C (10 marks each).
Part-A (1x10=10)
1. Define Isotope. 2. What is a Lewis base? 3. Define normality of a solution. 4. What are nano particles? 5. What is a positive catalyst? Give example. 6. Define non carbonate hardness of water. 7. What is electroless plating? 8. Define a fuel cell. 9. Define tinning. 10. Give the difference between paint and varnish.
PART- B (3x5 = 15)
Unit I 11. Explain the Lowry Bronsted theory of acids and bases. OR 12. Explain the formation of covalent bond with a suitable example. Unit II 13. Calculate the concentration of a solution of sulphuric acid in normality containing 1.85g of acid in 200ml of the solution. OR 14. List the differences between lyophillic and Lyophobic sols. Unit III 15. Give reasons for the depletion of underground water. OR 16. Give the characteristics of a catalyst. Unit IV 17. What are solar cells? Explain. OR 18. What is chemilumiscence? Give example. Unit V 19. Name the factors that affect the rate of corrosion. OR 20. Write notes on heat resistant paint.
Page 46 of 260
PART- C (10x5 = 50)
Unit I 21. a. Explain the formation of sodium chloride. b. Calculate the number of molecules of methane present in 5g of Methane. OR 22. a. Give the industrial applications of maintenance of pH. b. Derive the relationship between molecular mass and vapour density. Unit II 23. a. Calculate the molarity of a solution containing 2.85 g of urea [CO (NH2)2] in 150ml of solution. b. Describe Cottrell’s Electrostatic precipitator with a neat diagram. OR 24. a. Explain the optical and mechanical properties of colloids. b. Give the applications nano particles in medical field. Unit III 25. a. How is hard water softened by demineralization method? b. Give the industrial applications of catalyst. OR 26. a. How is hard water softened by reverse osmosis method? b. Explain the manufacture of glass. Unit IV 27. a. Define electrolysis. Explain the mechanism of electrolysis with a neat diagram. b. Explain chrome plating with a neat diagram. OR 28. a. Define Electrochemical series. Give the significance of electrochemical series. b. Explain the construction, working and uses of lead acid storage cell. Unit V 29. a. Explain galvanic cell formation theory of corrosion. b. Explain anodisation and phosphate with suitable example. OR 30. a. Describe the cathodic protection methods of prevention of corrosion. b. List the components of paint and give its functions.
Page 47 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code& Name: GEM15 ENGINEERING PHYSICS –I PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester
Marks
Duration in
Hours Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester Total
GEM15
Engineering
Physics – I
Practical
2 30 25 75 100 3
RATIONALE:
In diploma level engineering education skill development plays a vital role. The skill
development can be achieved by on hand experience in handling various instruments, apparatus
and equipment. This is accomplished by doing engineering related experiments in practical classes
in various laboratories.
GUIDELINES:
All the Nine experiments given in the list of experiments should be completed and given for the end semester practical examination.
In order to develop best skills in handling Instruments / Equipments and taking readings in the practical classes, every two students should be provided with a separate experimental setup for doing experiments in the laboratory.
The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single experimental question should not be given to more than four students while admitting a batch of 30 students during Board Examinations.
List of Experiments with objectives:
1. MICROMETER (SCREW GAUGE).
To measure the thickness of the given irregular glass plate using micrometer. To determine the area of the glass plate using a graph sheet and to calculate the volume of the glass plate. 2. VERNIER CALIPERS To measure the length and diameter of the given solid cylinder using vernier calipers and to calculate the volume of the solid cylinder.
Page 48 of 260
3. CONCURRENT FORCES To verify the parallelogram law of forces and Lami’s theorem. 4. PRINCIPLE OF MOMENTS To determine the mass of the given body using principle of moments. 5. COMPARISION OF VISCOSITIES To compare the coefficient of viscosities of two low viscous liquid by capillary flow method. 6. STOKES’ METHOD To determine the coefficient of viscosity of a high viscous liquid. 7. SURFACE TENSION To determine the surface tension of water by capillary rise method. 8. SONOMETER To determine the frequency of the given tuning fork. 9. DEFLECTION MAGNETOMETER To compare the magnetic moments of the two bar magnets using deflection magnetometer in TanA position, by equal distance method.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
S.No Allocation Marks
1 Formula with Explanation 10
2 Figure/ Circuit Diagram with parts & Tabular column
with proper Units
15
3 Observations 35
4 Calculations 10
5 Result 05
Total 75
Page 49 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C105.1
Calculate the area and volume of a
glass plate, volume of a solid
cylinder using micrometer and
vernier calliper respectively.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 1 1
C105.2
Verify the parallelogram law of
forces and Lami’s theorem and
determine the mass of given body
using principles of moments.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C105.3
Compare the coefficient of viscosity
of water and kerosene by capillary
flow method and determine the
coefficient of viscosity of high
viscous liquid by Stokes ‘method.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C105.4 Find the surface tension of water by
capillary flow method. 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C105.5 Check the frequency of given tuning
fork using laws of transverse
vibration in given stretched string.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C105.6 Relate magnetic moments of two bar
magnets using deflection
magnetometer.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 1 1
Total 18 18 18 12 6 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
Ave 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 1 1
Page 50 of 260
GEM 15 ENGINEERING PHYSICS - I PRACTICAL
MODEL QUESTION PAPER 3HOURS
1. Measure the thickness of the given irregular glass plate using micrometer. Determine the area of the glass plate using a graph sheet and calculate the volume of the glass plate.
2. Measure the length and diameter of the given solid cylinder using vernier calipers and then calculate the volume of the solid cylinder.
3. Verify the parallelogram law of forces and Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces.
4. Determine the mass of the given body using principle of moments.
5. Compare the coefficient of viscosities of two low viscous liquid by capillary flow method
6. Determine the coefficient of viscosity of a high viscous liquid by Stokes’ method.
7. Determine the surface tension of water by capillary rise method.
8. Determine the frequency of the given tuning fork using sonometer.
9. Compare the magnetic moments of the two bar magnets using deflection magnetometer in Tan-A position, by equal distance method.
Page 51 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code& Name: GEM16 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY-I PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No of Weeks per Semester: 15 weeks
Subject Code & Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration
in Hours
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Total
GEM16
Engineering
Chemistry- I
Practical
2
30
25
75
100
3
RATIONALE:
All matter is made up of chemicals. Knowledge of chemistry is essential to study all branches
of Engineering in order to know about the different engineering materials used in day-to-day life
and in different branches of study. The amount of chemical substances present in a given sample
is taught through Quantitative analysis. The quantity analysis is introduced through Volumetric
analysis in the first semester of the study.
Acidimetry and Alkalimetry: 1. Estimation of sodium hydroxide. 2. Estimation of sodium carbonate. 3. Estimation of sulphuric acid. 4. Estimation of oxalic acid. 5. Comparison of Sodium hydroxide solutions. 6. Comparison of Sulphuric acid solutions. 7. Comparison of Hydrochloric acid solutions. Permanganometry 8. Estimation of ferrous sulphate. 9. Estimation of Mohr’s salt. 10. Comparison of potassium permanganate. Water Analysis 11. Estimation of total hardness of a water sample using EDTA. 12. Determination of pH using a pH meter and calculation of hydrogen ion concentrations in the solutions.
Page 52 of 260
Reference Books:
1. Vogel – Analytical chemistry – Pearson publications. 2. Dr.Sudha rani – Laboratory manual on engineering chemistry Dhanpat rai publications.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
Sl. No
Allocation Marks
1 Short Procedure 10
2 I Titration (within 2% error) 25
3 II Titration (within 2% error) 25
4 Calculations (3*5=15) 15
Total 75
Page 53 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C106.1 Understand the concept of acidimetry - alkalimetry, i.e., neutralisation of a base by an acid.
2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C106.2
Carry out the neutralisation reactions between strong acid and strong base using phenolphthalein indicator.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C106.3 Execute the neutralisation reactions between strong acid and weak base using methyl orange indicator.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C106.4 Find the amount of the substance in terms of mass in grams present in the given solution.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - -
C106.5
To estimate the amount of salt using the concept of permanganometry ,i.e., oxidation of ferrous ions to ferric ions by KMnO4
2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C106.6 Identify the hardness of water by EDTA method and to find pH of a solution using pH meter.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - 1
Total 16 16 16 12 6 - - - - - - 2 - 1
Ave 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - 1
Page 54 of 260
GEM 16 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY I PRACTICAL
PRACTICAL MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MODEL 1: 3 Hours
Estimate the amount of ferrous sulphate present in 500ml of the given solution using a standard
solution of ferrous ammonium sulphate of strength 0.0989N and an approximately decinormal
solution of potassium permanganate.
MODEL 2:
Calculate the total hardness of the given sample of water using a standard hard water solution of
molarity 0.01 M and an approximately dissimilar solution of EDTA.
MODEL 3:
Determine the pH of five given samples using pH meter and calculate the hydrogen ion
concentration of the samples.
Page 55 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code & Name: GEM17 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS – I PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Total
GEM17
ENGINEERING
GRAPHICS – I
PRACTICAL
6 90 25 75 100 3 Hrs
Topics and Allocation of Hours
Topics Details Hours
a)
b)
Drawing office practice, Lettering and Dimensions. Introduction to
Orthographic Projection, Geometric Constructions, Construction of
Polygon (Manual Drafting and Computer Aided Drafting) Practice on CAD
15
16
c)
d)
e)
Constructions of conic sections.(Manual Drafting and
Computer Aided Drafting)
Constructions of special curves.(Manual Drafting)
15
10
f)
g)
Projection of points and
straight lines.(Manual Drafting) 17
h) Projection of solids.(Manual Drafting and
Computer Aided Drafting) 17
Total 90
Page 56 of 260
RATIONALE:
Engineering graphics is a basic subject for all branches of Diploma Engineering and Technology.
Since engineering drawing is considered as the language of engineers, the Proper understanding
and practice is required with proper instruments. This subject is aimed at providing basic
understanding of the fundamentals of Engineering Drawing; mainly visualization, graphics theory,
standards & conventions of drawing, the tools of drawing and the use of Drawings in engineering
applications. The topics covered are based on the syllabus for Diploma studies in engineering. The
subject is planned to include sufficient practices which would help the student in Visualization of
three dimensional objects and developing the drawing. The chapters are arranged in sequence
and starts from the basic concepts of geometrical constructions & engineering curves, proceeds to
the principles of projection techniques. By the end of the subject it is expected that the students
would be matured to visualize any engineering component by reading an engineering drawing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Recognize the drawing tools and key aspects of the Drawing.
Classify and construct the various types of polygons and use correct dimensioning methods.
Identify the uses of various tools and commands in AutoCAD software and apply them to draw in AutoCAD.
Construct the conics and the special curves and their applications. Understand the concepts of Projections of points, lines and solids and know how to use
them to project an object in simple position.
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Topics Details Hours
a) Practice on CAD Starting Auto CAD-Setting up of a new drawing- Creating a new drawing- Drawing units -Limits - Grid and Snap-Menus and Tool Bars-Save-Open and exiting drawing. Draw command:Line,Circle,Arc,Polygon,Ellipse,Rectangle,Hatch, Mtext, Plane. Modify Commands- Erase – Copy, Mirror, Offset, Array, Move, Rotate, Scale, and Stretch, Lengthen, Trim, Extend, Break, Chamfer, Fillet, Explode, Pedit. Object Snap methods, Dimensions commands. Other useful commands- Zoom, Plot, Ltype, Block, Insert, and Divide.
16
b) Constructions of conic sections. (Manual Drafting and Computer Aided Drafting)Conic section: Cone – conic sections- Definition of locus, focus, directrix, axis, vertex and eccentricity- Definition: ellipse and parabola Ellipse: Construction of ellipse by concentric circle method, rectangular method and eccentricity method with tangent and normal when focus and directrix are given - exercises.
15
Page 57 of 260
Parabola: Construction of parabola by rectangular method, parallelogram method and eccentricity method with tangent and normal when focus and directrix are given – exercises.
e) Constructions of special curves. (Manual Drafting ) Special curves: Definition - constructions of cycloid – Epicycloid – hypocycloid – exercises. Involutes of a circle – Archimedean spiral – helix – exercises.
10
f) Projection of points. (Manual Drafting ) Projection of points – points on the different quadrants and on the reference planes.
17
g) Projection of straight lines. (Manual Drafting ) Projection of straight line – parallel to one plane and perpendicular to other plane –inclined to one plane and parallel to the other plane – parallel to both the planes – inclined to both the planes-exercises.
h) Projection of solids (Manual Drafting and Computer Aided Drafting) Introduction – important terms – classification of solids – polyhedron -- solids of revolution. Projections of solids in simple positions – axis parallel to one plane and perpendicular to other plane – axis inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane – axis parallel to both planes – exercises in prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone.
17
Text Books: 1. GEM 17 Engineering Graphics-I, Murugappa Polytechnic College, 2016 Reference Books: 1. Gill P.S., “Engineering drawings”, S.K.Kataria& Sons. 2. Bhat N.D. “Engineering drawings”, Charotar Publishing house. 3. Gopalakrishnan.K.R., “Engineering drawing”, (Vol.I and vol.II), Dhanalakshmi publishers, Ed.2, 1970 4. Venugopal.K,Sreekanjana G, “Engineering Graphics” New Age International Publishers. 5. K V Nataraajan “A Text Book of Engineering drawing”.
Page 58 of 260
LIST OF EXERCISES: Lettering Practice: 1.Exercise on Manual Drawing 2. Exercise on CAD Dimensioning Practice &: 3.Exercise on Manual Drawing Geometric construction 4. Exercise on CAD Conic section – I: 5.Exercise on Manual Drawing 6. Exercise on CAD Conic section – II: 7.Exercise on Manual Drawing 8. Exercise on CAD Special curves: 9. Exercise on Manual Drawing Projection of points: 10. Exercise on Manual Drawing Projection of lines: 11. Exercise on Manual Drawing h)Projection of solids: 12. Exercise on Manual Drawing 13. Exercise on CAD REQUIREMENTS: Drawing Tables and Computers with AutoCAD software package.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
Question No.
Allocation Marks
Manual CAD
1. a) Lettering b) Dimensioning
04 06
04 06
2. CAD Practice (Any one special drawing) ---- 10
3. Conics(Either or Type) 07 07
4. Special Curves (either or type) 10 ----
5. Projection of Points / Lines (Either or Type) 05 ----
6. Projection of Solids 08 08
Total 40 35
Page 59 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C107.1
Recognize the drawing tools and key aspects of the Drawing.
3 1 - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
C107.2
Classify and construct the various types of polygons and use correct dimensioning methods.
2 - 1 - - - - - 3 - 1 2 1 1
C107.3
Identify the uses of various tools and commands in AutoCAD software and apply them to draw in AutoCAD.
3 - 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
C107.4
Construct the conics and the special curves and their applications.
3 - 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
C107.5
Understand the concepts of Projections of points, lines and solids and know how to use them to project an object in simple position.
3 - 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
Total 14 1 7 5 - - - - 3 - 1 2 3 3
Ave 2.8 1 1.75 1.25 - - - - 3 - 1 2 1.5 1.5
Page 60 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : I Subject Code & Name : GEM18 BASIC COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours
/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks
Duration
in hours
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Total
GEM18 BASIC COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL
3 45 25 75 100 3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Carryout the basic operation on files and folders in windows.
Create a simple document using formatting styles, insertion of pictures, tables, shapes and design the pages.
Carry out the creation of tables, inserting chart, pictures and formula’s to solve the calculation using spreadsheet.
Using power point presentation, present the information with various styles, effect, transistions and animations.
Explain and demonstrate the storage of information in database and generating reports from the data base.
Create manage files and documents for project reports, paper presentation and resuming preparation for placements.
SYLLABUS
OPERATING SYSTEM
Introduction – Hardware, software – types – operating systems – Graphical User Interface
(GUI) – Windows – Desktop – Start – Programs – Run – Settings – Control Panel – Display,
Sounds & Audio devices, Printer – Windows Explorer – files, folders - copy, paste, move, delete
– Recycle bin.
WORD PROCESSING
File – create – templates – edit - format – alignment, font settings – Insert - Table, pictures –
Page setup - print preview - mail merge
SPREADSHEET
Create, format – formulae – freeze - row, column – Filter records – criteria - Charts – types,
insert, format, data
Page 61 of 260
PRESENTATION
Create simple presentation – templates - Insert – table, pictures – Transitions – Sounds - Slides
– insert, delete, sorting, and running.
DATABASE
Creating the database – data types - entering the data – insert, delete, update, view, sorting,
filtering - data report generation of an application.
LIST OF EXERCISES:
1. Setting the user working environments in Windows through the Control Panel.
2. Managing files and folders by using the Windows explorer.
3. Creating and formatting the content of a file in Word processor.
4. Inserting table and pictures in a Word processor files.
5. Creating a Mail-merge application in a Word processor.
6. Creating and formatting the data in a Spreadsheet
7. Calculating row-wise and column-wise data using formulae in a Spreadsheet.
8. Create a separate table based on criteria by using auto filter feature in a spreadsheet.
9. Inserting and formatting Charts for a series of data in Spreadsheet.
10. Creating a simple presentation in Presentation software
11. Prepare a presentation using table and pictures in a Presentation software
12. Creating a presentation using various transitions and sounds in Presentation software
13. Creating an application format and entering the data in a database.
14. Generating a data report of an application in a database.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Question
Procedure 15
Execution 15
Output 05
2 Question
Procedure 15
Execution 15
Output 05
3 Viva voce 05
Total 75
Reference: “GEM18 Basic Computer Applications Practical manual”, Dept. of Computer Engg.
Page 62 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C108.1 Carryout the basic operation on files and folders in windows.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3
C108.2
Create a simple document using formatting styles, insertion of pictures, tables, shapes and design the pages.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
C108.3
Carry out the creation of tables, inserting chart, pictures and formula’s to solve the calculation using spreadsheet.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
C108.4
Using power point presentation, present the information with various styles, effect, transitions and animations.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 3
C108.5
Explain and demonstrate the storage of information in database and generating reports from the data base.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3
C108.6
Create manage files and documents for project reports, paper presentation and resume preparation for placements.
3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 1 3
Total 18 18 18 18 - - - - - - - 15 3 16
Ave 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2.5 1 2.67
Page 63 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code & Name: GEM21 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code
& Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester
Marks
Duration in
hours Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester Total
GEM21
Engineering
Mathematics II
5 75 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours
Unit No. Topics Hours
I Analytical Geometry 15
II Vector Algebra – I 15
III Vector Algebra – II 15
IV Integral Calculus – I 15
V Integral Calculus – II 15
Total 75
Rationale:
In many fields of Engineering, there are situations where in the effects due to various
factors can be calculated only in a smaller region. To calculate the total effect or effect over a
larger region the Integration concept is used. Integration plays vital role in many fields of
Engineering.
Page 64 of 260
. DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT NAME OF TOPICS HOURS
I
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 1.1 EQUATION OF CIRCLE Equation of circle – given center and radius. General equation of circle – finding Centre and radius. Equation of circle on the line joining the points (x1, y1) and (x2,y2) as diameter. Simple problems. 1.2 FAMILY OF CIRCLES Concentric circles, contact of two circles (Internal and External) – Simple problems. Orthogonal circles (results only). Problems verifying the condition. 1.3 INTRODUCTION TO CONIC SECTION Definition of a Conic, Focus, Directrix and Eccentricity. General equation of a conic ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 (statement only). Condition for conic (i)
for circle: a=b and h = 0 (ii) for pair of straight line = 0 (iii) for
parabola: h2 –ab =0 (iv) for ellipse: h2 –ab < 0 and (v) for hyperbola: h2 –ab >0. Simple problems. Pair of straight line passing through origin – simple problems.
5
5
5
II
VECTOR ALGEBRA – I 2.1 VECTOR – INTRODUCTION Definition of vector – types, addition and subtraction of vectors. Properties of addition and subtraction. Position vector. Resolution of vector in two and three dimensions. Direction cosines, Direction ratios. Simple problems. 2.2 SCALAR PRODUCT OF VECTORS Definition of Scalar product of two vectors – Properties - Angle between two vectors. Simple problems. 2.3 APPLICATION OF SCALAR PRODUCT Geometrical meaning of scalar product. Work done by Force. Simple problems.
5
5
5
III
VECTOR ALGEBRA – II 3.1 VECTOR PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS Definition of vector product of two vectors. Geometrical meaning. Properties – Angle between two vectors - unit vector perpendicular to two vectors. Simple problems. 3.2 APPLICATION OF VECTOR PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS & SCALAR TRIPLE PRODUCT Definition of moment of a force. Definition of scalar product of three vectors – Geometrical meaning – Coplanar vectors. Simple problems. 3.3 VECTOR TRIPLE PRODUCT & PRODUCT OF MORE VECTORS Definition of vector triple product, Scalar and Vector product of four vectors. Simple Problems.
5
5
5
Page 65 of 260
IV
INTEGRAL CALCULUS – I 4.1 INTEGRATION – DECOMPOSITION METHOD Introduction – Definition of Integration – Integral values using reverse process of differentiation – Integration using decomposition method. Simple problems. 4.2 INTEGRATION BY SUBSTITUTION
Integrals of the form , n -1, and .
Simple problems. 4.3 STANDARD INTEGRALS
Integrals of the form , , and (denominator
can be factorized). Simple Problems.
5
5
5
V
INTEGRAL CALCULUS II 5.1 INTEGRATION BY PARTS Integrals of the form , , , and
. Simple problems.
5.2 BERNOULLI’S FORMULA Evaluation of the integrals , and where
m 2 using Bernoulli’s formula. Simple problems.
5.3 DEFINITE INTEGRALS Definition of definite integral. Properties of definite integrals – Simple problems.
5
5
5
Text Book
Engineering Mathematics II for polytechnic colleges –E.Geethalakshmi & M. Narayana
vadivoo - Saravana publisher
Reference Book:
1. Engineering Mathematics II& III –E.Geethalakshmi& M. Narayana vadivoo- Saravana publishers.
2. Mathematics for Higher Secondary – I year and II year (Tamil Nadu Text Book Corporation) 3. Engineering Mathematics – Dr.M.K.Venkatraman, National Publishing Co, Chennai. 4. Engineering Mathematics – Dr.P.Kandasamy& Others. S.Chand& Co Ltd, New Delhi
Page 66 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C109.1
Carry out the concept of circles to find equation of circle, point of contact, orthogonal circles and concentric circles.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C109.2
Identify the given equation to represent a pair of straight lines and find equation of parabola, ellipse, hyperbola for a given focus, directrix and eccentricity.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C109.3
Apply the basic concept of vector algebra to find direction cosine, position vector and resolution of vector in two & three dimension; Find angle between two vectors, work done using scalar product.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C109.4
Find unit vector, sine of the angle between two vector, Parallel vectors, area of parallelogram, area of triangle, coplanar vector, Volume of parallelepiped and moment of a force using cross product of vectors; Carryout the concept of product of two vectors to find product of more vectors.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C109.5
Use the concept of integration methods and standard integrals to find the integration of simple problems.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 1 1
C109.6
Determine the integrals of simple problems using integration by parts & Bernoulli’s formula and carryout the integration methods to evaluate simple definite integrals.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 1 1
Total 18 18 4 - - - - - - - 3 3 2 2
Ave 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1.5 1.5 1 1
Page 67 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 3hrs Max. Marks: 75
Subject Code and Name: GEM 21 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II
Note: 1. Answer ALL the questions in PART –A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – C (10 marks each).
PART A (1x10=10)
1. Find the Centre and radius of the circle x2+y2- 22x-4y+25=0. 2. Show that the equation represents a hyperbola.
3. Find the unit vector along the vector 3 -2 +
4. Show that the vectors 2 - and 3 + +9 are perpendicular.
5. If =3, =2 and =4 find the value of sin θ is the angles between and .
6. Find the value of
7. Evaluate :
8. Evaluate:
9. Integrate :
10. Evaluate:
PART-B (3x5=15)
UNIT I
11. Find the equation of the circle on the line joining the points (2,1) and (4,-1) as diameter. [OR] 12. Prove that the circles x2 + y2 +2x+4y +1 = 0 and x2 + y2-5x – 14y -34 =0 cut orthogonally.
UNIT II
13. Show that the points with position vectors -2 +3 , -2 +3 +2 and -8 +13 are collinear [OR]
14. If the position vectors of the points A and B are + + and 2 +2 + find the modulus and
direction cosines of . UNIT III
15. Find the volume of the parallelepiped whose co terminus sides are - 2 3 - and
3 2 +5 [OR]
16. If =3 +2 -4 , =5 -3 +6 and = 5 - +2 find ( X ).
UNIT IV
17. Evaluate: [OR]
18. Evaluate: .
UNIT V
19. Integrate: [OR] 20. Evaluate:
Page 68 of 260
PART-C (10x5= 50)
UNIT I
21. a) Find the equation of the circle passing through the point (2,1) and having its entreat (-3,4) b) If one end of the diameter of the circle x2+y2-10x -12y +43=0 is (8,9) find the other end. [OR]
22. a) Show that the circles x2+y2 -4x+6y-112=0 and x2+y2-10x -6y +14=0 touch each other. b) Find the value of k such that the equation
represents a pair of straight lines. UNIT II
23. a) Prove that the points whose position vectors are 2 +4 +3 , 4 + -4 and 6 +5 -
form a right angled triangle
b) Using scalar multiplication of vectors find the angle between the vectors 3 -2 +
and 2 + + [OR]
24. a)Prove that the vectors 2 -2 + , +2 + and 2 + -2 are mutually perpendicular
vectors.
b) If a force +3 -2 displaces a particle from the point (1,-1,2) to the point (4,3,5) find
the work done by the force.
UNIT-III
25. a) Find the unit vector perpendicular to both the vectors - + and 2 +3 - . Find also the value of sine of the angle between them
b) Find the torque about the point (4,3,2) of the force represented by 5 -4 +2 acting through the point (0,1,-3). [OR]
26. a) If =2 +3 + , = -2 +3 and = 3 +2 -5 Verify that ( X )=( ) - ( ) b) Find the area of the triangle whose position vectors of the vertices are 2 +3
+ ,3 +4 +5 and 4 + +3 .
UNIT - IV
27. a) Integrate: (i) (ii) sin7x cos2x
b) Integrate: (i) (ii)
[OR]
28. a) Integrate: (i) (ii)
b) Integrate: (i) (ii)
Page 69 of 260
UNIT – V
29. a) Integrate: (i) x cos3x (ii) x2logx b) Integrate: (i) x2sinx (ii) x2 e2x [OR]
30. a) Integrate: (i) x sin2x (ii) x2e3x
b) Evaluate:
Page 70 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONENGINEERING Semester : II Subject Code & Name : GEM22 APPLIED MATHEMATICS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per Semester: 15
Topics and Allocation of Hours
Unit No. Topics Hours
I Probability Distribution – I 15
II Probability Distribution – II 15
III Application of differentiation 15
IV Application of Integration – I 15
V Application of Integration – II 15
Total 75
Rationale:
Many of Physical Engineering Problems like vibration of two side tied strings. Heat flow,
decaying of radioactive material comes only in the form of differential equation; solution of
differential equation gives solution of Physical problems.
Subject Code
& Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester
Marks
Duration in
hours Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester Total
GEM22
Applied
Mathematics
5 75 25 75 100 3
Page 71 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT NAME OF TOPICS HOURS
I
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION – I 1.1 RANDOM VARIABLE Definition of Random variable – Types – Probability mass function – Probability density function, simple problems. 1.2 MATHEMATICAL EXPECTATION Mathematical Expectation of discrete random variable, mean and variance. Simple problems. 1.3 BINOMIAL DISTRIBUTION Definition of Binomial distribution P(X=x) = nCxpxqn-x where x = 0,1,2,…n statement only. Expression for mean and variance. Simple problems.
5
5
5
II
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION II 2.1 POISSON DISTRIBUTION
Definition of Poisson distribution P(X=x) = where x = 0,1,2…n (statement
only). Expressions of mean and variance. Simple problems. 2.2 NORMAL DISTRIBUTION Definition of normal and standard normal distribution – statement only. Constants of normal distribution (Results only). Properties of normal distribution – simple problems using the table of standard normal distribution. 2.3 CURVE FITTING Fitting of straight line using least square method (Results only). Simple problems.
5
5
5
III
APPLICATION OF DIFFERENTIATION 3.1 VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION Velocity and Acceleration – simple problems. 3.2 TANGENT AND NORMAL Tangent and Normal – simple problems. 3.3 MAXIMA AND MINIMA Definition of increasing and decreasing functions and turning points. Maxima and Minima of single variable only – simple problems. – Practical problems involving maximum and minimum values.
5
5
5
IV
APPLICATION OF INTEGRATION –I 4.1 AREA AND VOLUME Area and Volume – Area of circle, Volume of sphere and Cone – Simple problems. 4.2 LINEAR TYPE DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Solution of linear differential equation. Simple problems. 4.3 FOURIER TRANSFORMS Fourier transforms - Simple problems.
5
5
5
Page 72 of 260
V
APPLICATION OF INTEGRATION – II 5.1 SECOND ORDER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION – I Solution of second order differential equation with constant co efficient in the
form a +b +cy = 0 where a,b and c are constants. Simple problems.
5.2 SECOND ORDER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION – II Solution of second order differential equation with constant co efficient in the
form a +b +cy = f(x) where a,b and c are constants and f(x) = k emx. Simple
problems. 5.3 SECOND ORDER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION – III Solution of second order differential equation with constant co efficient in the
form a +b +cy = f(x) where a,b and c are constants and f(x) = k sinmx or
k cosmx. Simple problems.
5
5
5
Text Book
Applied Mathematics –E.Geethalakshmi, & M. Narayana vadivoo - Saravana publisher
Reference Book:
1.Engineering Mathematics II, III & IV –E.Geethalakshmi, & M. Narayana vadivoo -
Saravana publisher
2.Mathematics for Higher Secondary – I year and II year Tamil Nadu Text Book corp.
3.Engineering Mathematics – Dr.M.K.Venkatraman, National Publishing Co, Chennai.
4 .Engineering Mathematics – Dr.P.Kandasamy& Others. S.Chand& Co Ltd, New Delhi
Page 73 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C110.1
Use the concept of random variable
and binomial distribution to find the
mean, variance and probability of
the respective distribution.
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
C110.2
Identify the Poisson, Normal
distribution and find their
probabilities; using the method of
least square find the line of best fit.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C110.3
Interpret the concept of
differentiation to find its application
like velocity & acceleration, tangent
& normal and Maxima & Minima.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - -
C110.4 Find area, volume and First order
linear type differential equation
using application of integration.
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
C110.5 Solve simple problems of Fourier
transformation using application of
integration.
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
C110.6 Manipulate the solution for second
order differential equation using
application of integration.
3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
Total 18 18 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
Ave 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 - -
Page 74 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 3hrs Max. Marks: 75
Subject Code and Name: GEM22 APPLIED MATHEMATICS
Note: 1. Answer ALL the questions in PART –A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE questions from each Unit in PART – B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each Unit in PART – C (10 marks each) 4. Normal table to be distributed
PART-A (1x10=10)
1. Define random variable. 2. In a binomial distribution if n=9 and p=1/3, what is its variance? 3. The variance of poison distribution is 0.25. Find P(X=0). 4. State the normal equations to fit the straight line y= mx+c 5. If s= 2t3+4t-5, find the initial velocity. 6. Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y2= 4x at the point (1,2) 7. What is the area bounded by the curve y=x3, x axis and the ordinates x=1 and x=4.
8. Find the integrating factor of
9. Solve: (D2-9)y=0 10. Find the complementary function of (D2 -7D+12)y=e5x
PART-B (3x5=15)
UNIT I 11. The mean and variance of a Binomial distribution are 16 and 8 respectively. Find P(x=0)
[OR] 12. If a random variable X has the following probability distribution
X 1 2 3 4 5
P(X=x) 1/9 2/9 4/9 1/9 1/9
Find E (4X+7) UNIT II
13. A Random variable X follows poisson distribution such that P(X=2) =P(x=3), find the mean of the distribution. [OR]
14. If X is normally distributed with mean 80 and S.D. 10 find P(70 <X< 100).
UNIT III 15. The distance s described by a particle in time t secs is given by s= a cos t +bsin t. Show that
the acceleration is always varying to distance passed over. [OR]
16. Find the minimum value of the function y=x2-10x
Page 75 of 260
UNIT IV
17. Find the volume generated when the area bounded by the curve y= , the x axis and the
ordinates x=0 and x=2. [OR]
18. Solve: sec2y tanx dy + tany sec2x dx=0 UNIT V
19. Solve: (D2 +2D+1)y=0 [OR]
20. Find the particular integral of ((D2 +2D+1) y=4 .
21. (D2 -6D+9) y=2 .
PART-C (10x5=50)
UNIT I
22. a. If a random variable X has the following probability distribution
X 0 1 2 3
P(X=x) 1/3 1/6 1/6 1/3
Find the mean and variance. b. A random variable X has the following probability distribution
X -2 -1 0 1 2 3
P(X) 4m 6m 7m 5m 5m 12m
Find (i) the value of m (ii) P(X>1) (iii) P (-1 x 2) (iv) P(X<2) [OR]
23. a. Show that f(x)= is a probability density function
b. Eight coins are tossed simultaneously. Find the probability of getting (i) exactly 5
Heads (ii) at least 5 heads.
UNIT II
24. a. If 3% of the items manufactured by a company are defective, Find the probability That in a sample of 100 items exactly (I) one item is defective (ii) none defective
b. In an aptitude test administered to 900 students, the mean is 50 and the standard Deviation is 20. Find (i) the number of students securing between 30 and 70 (ii) Number of students exceeding the score of 60. [OR]
25. a. Find the probability that at least 3 defective fuses will be found in a box of 200 fuses If experience shows that 2% of such fuses are defective.
b. Fit a straight line for the following data by the method of least square:
X 0 1 2 3 4
Y 1 1.8 3.3 4.5 6.3
Page 76 of 260
UNIT III
26. a. The distance s meters travelled by a particle moving along a straight line is given by s= 2t3-9t2+12t -6. Find (i) the velocity when acceleration is zero.(ii) the acceleration when the velocity is zero b. Find the equation of the tangent and normal to the curve y = 6+x+x2 at (2,4).
[OR]
27. a. Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x2-7x+12 at the points where the curve cuts the X axis. b. Find the maximum and minimum values of the function y=2x3-3x2-36x+10
UNIT IV
28. a. Find the area bounded by the curve y= and the ordinate axes x- axes.
b. Find the volume of a right circular cone of height h and radius r by integration .
[OR]
28. a. Solve: = (1+x2)2
b.Find the fourier transform of f(x)=1 for .
UNIT V
29. a. Solve: +3 +2y = 0 if y(0)=1, y′(0)=0
b. Solve: (D2-4D+13)y= e2x
[OR]
30. a. Solve: (D2-5D+4)y= e4x
b. Solve: (D2+16)y= sin9x
Page 77 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code& Name: GEM23 ENGINEERING PHYSICS - II
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code&
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration
in hours Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Total
GEM23
Engineering
Physics - II
4 60 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours
RATIONALE:
The exponential growth of Engineering and Technology has benefited the mankind with
extreme sophistication and comfort. To sustain this development, continuous research and
development should take place not only in Engineering and Technology but also in Basic Science
such as Physics. The various divisions of Physics like Optics, Acoustics, Dynamics, Semiconductor
Physics, Surface Physics, Nuclear Physics, Energy Studies, Materials Science, etc. provide the
foundation by enlightening the Fundamental facts, Principles, Laws and Correct sequence of
events to develop the Engineering and Technology field for the prosperity of human beings.
UNIT Topic Time(Hrs.)
I Heat 12
II Thermodynamics, Liquefaction Of Gases & Non-Conventional Energy
12
III Light And Remote Sensing 12
IV Electricity 12
V Electronics 12 Total 60
Page 78 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the topic
Hours
I
HEAT TRANSFER OF HEAT Concept of Heat and Temperature – Centigrade, Fahrenheit and Kelvin scales of temperature measurement – Conduction, convection and radiation – Definitions and explanations – Coefficient of thermal conductivity – Definition and SI unit – Selection of good and poor thermal conductors – Properties of thermal radiation. KINETIC THEORY OF GASES Postulates – Mean square velocity and Root Mean Square (RMS) velocity of molecules – Definitions and expressions – Expression for the pressure of a gas on the basis of postulates of kinetic theory of gases- Relation between pressure and kinetic energy, pressure and absolute temperature of the gas. Simple problems based on the expression for the pressure of a gas. 1.3 SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY Specific heat capacity of a substance (solids and liquids) – Definition – Specific heat capacity of a gas at constant volume – Specific heat capacity of a gas at constant pressure – Ratio of specific heat capacities – Explanation for Cp greater than Cv – Derivation of Meyer’s relation – calculation of Universal gas constant R from the gas equation PV = RT. Simple problems based on Meyer’s relation.
3
5
4
II
THERMODYNAMICS, LIQUEFACTION OF GASES & NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 2.1 THERMODYNAMICS Zeros law and first law of thermodynamics – Explanation - Isothermal and Adiabatic changes - Explanation – Equations for isothermal and adiabatic changes (No derivation).Simple problems based on equations P1V1 = P2V2 and P1V1
γ = P2V2γ.Second
law of thermodynamics – Claudius statement and Kelvin’s statement – Concept of Carnot’s reversible engine and efficiency. 2.2 LIQUEFACTION OF GASES Liquefaction, critical temperature, critical pressure and critical volume – Definitions – Principle used in cascade process – Cascade process of liquefaction of oxygen –Disadvantages of cascade process - Joule Thomson effect – Temperature of inversion – Liquefaction of air by Linde’s process. 2.3 NON – CONVENTIONAL ENERGY Introduction – Non-renewable and Renewable (Alternate) energy sources – Examples – Solar energy, wind energy. Advantages and disadvantages of renewable energy.
5
4
3
Page 79 of 260
III
LIGHT AND REMOTE SENSING 3.1 OPTICS Refraction – Laws of refraction – Refractive index of a medium / material. Derivation of refractive index of glass prism using in minimum deviation. – Definition – Fibre optics – Introduction – Phenomenon of total internal reflection –Advantages of O.F.C.Problems using the formula of refractive index. 3.2 LASER LASER – Characteristics of LASER – principle of LASER – Spontaneous emission – Stimulated emission – population inversion – Production of LASER using semiconductor (GaAs) diode source – Uses of LASER. 3.3 PHOTO ELECTRIC EFFECT Photo electric effect – Introduction – Hallwachs experimental arrangement – Einstein’s photoelectric equation – Laws of photoelectric emission – Photo emissive cell –Photo conductive cell - Photo voltaic cell – Applications of photo cells. 3.4 REMOTE SENSING Remote sensing – Introduction – Active and passive remote sensing – Explanation and examples – Components of remote sensing – Data acquisition, data analysis and reference data – RADAR – principle and working with block diagram.
3
3
3
3
IV
ELECTRICITY 4.1 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS Ohm’s law – Laws of resistances – Resistivity and Conductivity – Definitions – Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws – Condition for balancing the Wheat stone’s network .Simple problems based on expression for resistivity. 4.2 HEATING AND CHEMICAL EFFECTS OF CURRENT Joule’s law of heating – Experimental determination of specific heat capacity of a liquid using Joule’s calorimeter – Faraday’s laws of electrolysis – Electro chemical equivalent (e.c.e) of an element – Definition – Experimental determination of e.c.e. of copper. Simple problems based on expression for e.c.e. MEASURING INSTRUMENTS Motion of a charged particle inside a uniform magnetic field – Expression for the force acting on a current carrying straight conductor placed in a uniform magnetic field – Fleming’s Left Hand rule – Expression for the torque experienced by a rectangular current carrying coil placed inside a uniform magnetic field – Working of a moving coil galvanometer and its merits – Conversion of galvanometer into an Ammeter and Voltmeter. Simple problems based on conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. 4.4 CAPACITORS Capacitance of a capacitor – Definition – ‘farad’– Definition – Expressions for effective capacitance when capacitors are connected in series and parallel.Simple problems based on expressions for effective capacitance for series and parallel connections of capacitors.
3
3
4
2
Page 80 of 260
V
ELECTRONICS 5.1 SEMI CONDUCTORS Semiconductors – Energy bands in solids – Energy band diagram of good conductors, insulators and semiconductors – Fermi Level – Intrinsic semiconductors - Concept of positive holes - Doping – Extrinsic semiconductors – P type and N type semiconductors. 5.2 DIODES AND TRANSISTORS P-N junction diode – Forward bias and reverse bias – Rectification action of diode – Working of full wave rectifier using P N junction diodes in bridge type configuration. PNP and NPN transistors – Three different configurations – Advantages of common emitter configuration – working of NPN transistor as an amplifier in common emitter configuration. 5.3 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Digital electronics – Introduction – Logic levels – Basic logic gates: OR, AND and NOT gates – Universal logic gates: NAND and NOR gates – Special logic gates: XOR and XNOR gates – Symbolic representation, Boolean expression and Truth table for all above logic gates – Integrated circuits – Levels of integration – SSI, MSI, LSI and VLSI, Advantages of ICs.
3
4
5
Text Book : 1) Higher secondary Physics – First & Second year– Volume I & II – Tamil Nadu text book Corporation 2).Kamal -- Intermediate physics – Volume I & II –– Foundation booksprivate Ltd. 3) P.Indira & M.Eswari-Engineering physics II – Saravana publishers. Reference Book: 1) Brijlal and Subrahmanyam –Heat and Thermodynamics –. S. Chand & co, New Delhi 2) D.N. Vasudeva --Fundamentals of Electricity –– S. Chand & co.,New Delhi 3) G.D. Rai -- Non- Conventional energy sources – Khanna publishers, New Delhi. 4) M. Anji Reddy -- Text book of remote sensing and Geographical information systems – BS publications. Hyderabad.
Page 81 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C111.1
Solve simple problems for the pressure of a gas and Meyer’s relation using the concepts of heat and kinetic theory of gasses.
3 3 1 - - - - - - -
C111.2
Implement the concept of law’s of thermodynamics in solving simple problems for isothermal and adiabatic change; apply the critical constants in the liquefaction of gases and basic introduction in non conventional energy.
3 2 1 - - - - - - -
C111.3
Illustrate the basic laws of light and to study the application in laser, photo electric effect and remote sensing.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 - 1
C111.4
Apply the basics of Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s Law in electrical circuits, heating elements, chemical effects in the measuring instruments and in capacitors.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 1
C111.5
Interpret the basics of semi conductors and to study diode as rectifier and transistor as an amplifier.
3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 1
C111.6
Employ the basics of digital electronics in basic logic gates, universal logic gates, special logic gates and in IC’s
3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 1
Total 18 17 14 - - - - - - - 11 11 - 4
Ave 3 2.8 2.3 - - - - - - - 2.75 2.75 - 1
Page 82 of 260
GEM 23: ENGINEERING PHYSICS - II
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks:75
PART – A (1x10=10)
Answer all the questions:
1. What is heat? 2. Write any one property of thermal radiation. 3. Write the zeroth law of thermodynamics. 4. What is the principle used in cascade process? 5. Expand the acronym LASER. 6. Write the Einstein’s photo electric equation. 7. Write Joule’s law of heating. 8. Write Fleming’s Right Hand Rule. 9. What is a ‘hole‘? 10. Draw the symbol for NOT gate and write the Boolean expression for the same PART – B (3 x 5 =15)
UNIT – I 11. Explain the process of conduction and convection. [OR] 12. Explain why Cp is greater than Cv for a gas? UNIT – II 13. Explain isothermal change. [OR] 14. Write a note on solar energy. UNIT – III 15. List the uses of LASER. [OR] 16. Explain the applications of photocells. UNIT – IV
17. A wire of length 1.5m and area of cross section 1.9 10-7 m-2 has the resistance 3.5 ohm. Calculate the resistivity of the material of the wire. [OR] 18. What is electromagnetic induction? Write Faraday’s laws of electro magnetic Induction. UNIT – V 19. Explain the formation of Extrinsic P - type semiconductors. [OR] 20. Explain the three possible configurations of a transistor and the advantages of common emitter configuration.
Page 83 of 260
PART – C (10x5= 50)
UNIT- I
21. The density of carbon di-oxide gas at S.T.P is 1.977 kg m-3. Find the R.M.S velocity of carbon
Di-oxide molecules.
[OR]
22. Derive Meyer’s Relation Cp-Cv=R.
UNIT – II 23. Describe Linde’s process for the liquefaction of air.
[OR]
24. What are the advantages and disadvantages of renewable sources of energy?
UNIT - III
25. Explain the phenomenon of total internal reflections with the help of ray diagram and
Give the relation between critical angle and refractive index.
[OR]
26. Explain the components of remote sensing (data acquisition, data analysis and
Reference data)
UNIT – IV
27. Calculate the current required to deposit 2 gram of copper in a copper voltammeter in half an
hour. The electro chemical equivalent of copper = 0.33 x 10-6 kg C-1.
[OR]
28. Explain how you will convert a moving coil galvanometer into an ammeter and a voltmeter.
UNIT – V
29. Derive the expressions for the effective capacitance of three capacitors when they are
connected in (i) Series and (ii) parallel.
[OR]
29. Explain the NAND
30. and NOR gates with symbols, Boolean expressions and truth tables.
Page 84 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code& Name: GEM 24 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY – II
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code&
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks
Duration
in hours
Continuous
Assessment
End Semester Total
GEM 24
Engineering
Chemistry – II
4 60 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit
No
Topics Time (Hrs.)
I Air pollution, Water pollution, Solid waste management and green
chemistry.
12
II Fuels and Rocket Propellants, Combustion and Refractories 12
III Extraction of metals, Powder Metallurgy, Alloys and Abrasives 12
IV Cement, Ceramics, Lubricants and Adhesives 12
V Plastics, Rubber, Composite materials 12
Total 60
RATIONALE: Modern development of industries requires more understanding of materials required for
engineering and industrial purposes. This part of chemistry explains various aspects with regard to environment, fuels, metals, alloys and polymers. This subject will develop the basic understanding and skill of Engineering Students.
Page 85 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT Name of the Topics Hours
I
AIR POLLUTION, WATER POLLUTION, SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT, GREEN CHEMISTRY 1.1 AIR POLLUTION Pollution and Air pollution- Definition – Air Pollutants (SO2, H2S, HF, CO Dust) – Sources and harmful effects – Acid rain – formation – Harmful effects – Green House effect – causes – Global Warming – Harmful effects – Ozone layer – importance – causes for depletion of Ozone layer (No equations) – Harmful effects of Ozone layer depletion – Control of air pollution. 1.2 WATER POLLUTION Causes of water pollution– (Sewage, effluents, algae microorganisms) – Harmful effects, sewerage – Definition- Sewage disposal-Industrial effluents – Harmful effects of effluents -Harmful effects of Heavy metal ions- (metals like Lead, Cadmium, Zinc and Copper) – treatment of effluents – Eutrophication –Definition and harmful effects. 1.3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT Solid wastes – definition – problems – types of solid wastes – methods of disposal- landfill – incineration. GREEN CHEMISTRY Definition – Goals of green chemistry (Basic ideas). Recycling –Definition-Examples-advantages of recycling (Basic ideas)
4
4
3
1
II
FUELS AND ROCKET PROPELLANTS, COMBUSTION,REFRACTORIES 2.1 FUELS AND ROCKET PROPELLANTS Fuel and fossil fuel-Definition – Calorific value – classification of fuel- solid fuels – wood, coal – varieties of coal-composition-specific uses-liquid fuels - petroleum – fractional distillation – Fractions and uses, cracking (concept only). Liquid Hydrogen as fuel – gaseous fuels preparation and specific uses of producer gas, water gas,–composition and uses of CNG and LPG –Relative advantages of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels. Rocket propellants – Essential characteristics – classification of propellants with examples – differences between solid and liquid propellants. COMBUSTION Combustion of fuels – Definition – combustion calculation by mass (for solid and liquid fuels) – combustion calculation of gaseous fuels – stoichiometric calculations – volume of air required – excess air – flue gas – flue gas analysis – Orsat Apparatus – simple numerical problems. REFRACTORIES Definition –Requirements of a good Refractory – classifications-Acidic, Basic and Neutral Refractories - with examples and uses of fireclay bricks, Alumina bricks and silica bricks.
5
5
2
Page 86 of 260
III
EXTRACTION OF METALS, POWDER METALLURGY, ALLOYS AND ABRASIVES 3.1 EXTRACTION OF METALS Extraction of Tungsten and Titanium – uses of Titanium and Tungsten 3.2 POWDER METALLURGY Definition – Preparation of Metal Powder – Atomization – Reduction of metal oxide – Applications of Powder Metallurgy. 3.3 ALLOYS Definition – purpose of Alloying - types –Ferrous alloys - Composition and uses of stainless steel, chromium steel and vanadium steel - Non-Ferrous alloys – Definition – Composition and uses of Nichrome, Dutch metal, German silver, Gun metal and Duralumin. 3.4 ABRASIVES Definition – classification – hardness in Moh’s scale – Natural abrasives – Diamond, Corundum, Emery, and Garnet – Synthetic abrasives – Carborundum – Boron carbide- manufacture – Properties and uses.
3
3
3
3
IV
CEMENT, CERAMICS, LUBRICANTS AND ADHESIVES 4.1 CEMENT Definition –Manufacture of Portland cement-wet process-setting of cement (No equation) 4.2 CERAMICS White pottery – Definition – manufacture of White pottery – uses – Definition of glazing – purpose – method – salt glazing. 4.3 LUBRICANT Definition – characteristics of Lubricants – Types of Lubricants, Solid, Semisolid and liquid lubricants. 4.4 ADHESIVES Definition-Requirements of good adhesives-Natural adhesive-uses of shellac, starch, Asphalt- Synthetic adhesive- uses of cellulose Nitrate, PVC, Phenol-formaldehyde and urea-formaldehyde.
3
3
3
3
V
PLASTICS, RUBBER, COMPOSITE MATERIALS 5.1 PLASTICS Plastics- Definition-Polymerization – Definition- types of polymerization – Addition polymerization formation of polythene – condensation polymerization – formation of bakelite – types of plastics – thermoplastics &thermo set plastics – Differences-mechanical properties of plastics – Advantages of plastics over traditional materials, (wood & metal) – reinforced or filled plastics – definitions – advantages – applications – polymers in surgery- biomaterial – definition – Biomedical uses of polyurethane, PVC, polypropylene and polyethylene. 5.2 RUBBER Definition - preparation from latex – defects of natural rubber- compounding of rubber – ingredients & their functions – vulcanization-Definition and purpose –Reclaimed rubber- Definition – process – properties – uses. 5.3 COMPOSITE MATERIALS Definition-Examples-Advantages over metals and polymers-General applications.
5
5
2
Page 87 of 260
Text Book: Engineering Chemistry II for Polytechnic College -K.Rajalakshmi & T.Kanmani – Saravana Publishers. Reference Books: Engineering Chemistry – Jain & Jain –Dhanpat rai & sons Engineering Chemistry – Uppal – Khanna publishers A text book of Engineering Chemistry – Dara .S.S. – S. Chand publication. A text book of Inorganic Chemistry - Sony PL – S. Chand publication. Chemistry of Engineering Material – C.V. Agarwal, Andranaidu C.Parameswara Moorthy – B.S. Publications
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C112.1
Describe the harmful effects of air pollutants, acid rain, green house effect, global warming, ozone layer depletion and execute the control of air pollution.
3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 - 1
C112.2
Interpret the threat faced by water pollution due to sewage and effluents; explain eutrophication and the health issues due to solid waste, implement solid waste management and green chemistry.
3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 - -
C112.3
Discuss about solid, liquid and gaseous fuels, classify rocket propellants, solve simple problems based on combustion calculation, classify the refractories and carry out their applications in industries.
3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 1 - -
C112.4
Summarise the metallurgy of titanium and tungsten, powder metallurgy, alloys of iron, nickel, copper and aluminium, list out the natural abrasives and the synthetic abrasives.
2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
C112.5
Outline the manufacture and hardening of cement describe the manufacture of white pottery, classify lubricants and adhesives.
2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - -
C112.6
Compare the properties and applications of polymers like plastics and rubber, classify and explain the importance of composite materials.
2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - -
Total 15 15 9 15 - - - - - - 2 3 - 1
Ave 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 - - - - - - 1 1 - 1
Page 88 of 260
GEM 24 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY II
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 3 Hrs Max Marks: 75
Note: 1. Answer all questions in Part-A (1 mark each)
2.Answer any one question from each Unit in Part-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any one question from each Unit in Part-C (10 mark each)
PART- A (10 x 1 = 10)
1. What is Acid rain?
2. Define Sewage.
3. Define Calorific value of a fuel.
4. What are Rocket propellants?
5. What is an alloy? Give one example.
6. What are abrasives?
7. Define setting of cement.
8. What is grease?
9. Give the uses of Bakelite.
10. What are composite materials?
PART- B (Marks 5x (1 x 3) = 15)
Unit I
11. Give the effects of acid rain.
OR
12. Explain any one method of disposal of solid wastes.
Unit II
13. Give the manufacture of water gas.
OR
14. A producer gas has the following composition by volume. CH4 = 3.5 %, CO = 25%, H2 = 10%,
CO2 = 10.8%, N2= 50.7%. Calculate the theoretical quantity of air required for combustion per m3
of the gas.
Page 89 of 260
Unit III
15. How is metal powder formed by reduction method?
OR
16. Give the preparation and properties of Norbide.
Unit IV
17. Give the uses of PVC and phenol formaldehyde.
OR
18. Explain the two types of Glazing.
Unit V
19. Mention the biomedical uses of polypropylene and polyethylene.
OR
20. How is rubber prepared from latex?
PART- C (5x10 = 50)
Unit I
21. a. Define global warming and discuss the bad effects of it.
b. Define Eutrophication. Give the harmful effects of it.
OR
22. a. What are the problems caused by solid wastes?
b. List the goals of Green chemistry.
Unit II
23. a. List out the heavy metal ions and give their harmful effects.
b. Give the advantages of gaseous fuel over other fuels.
OR
24. a. List the essential properties of a good propellant.
b. State the requirements of a good refractory.
Page 90 of 260
Unit III
25. a. How is tungsten extracted from its ores?
b. State the applications of powder metallurgy.
OR
26. a. Give the name, composition and uses of copper alloys.
b. How is Titanium extracted from its ores?
Unit IV
27. a. Give the manufacture of white pottery.
b. Mention the requirements of a good adhesives.
OR
28. a. State the characteristics of a good lubricant.
b. Give the manufacture of Portland cement.
Unit V
29. a. Give the differences between Thermoplastics and Thermo set
plastics.
b. Explain the compounding of rubber.
OR
30. a. Discuss the mechanical properties of plastics.
b. What are the advantages of composite materials over metals and
polymers?
Page 91 of 260
Course name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II Subject code& name: GEM25 COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN ENGLISH PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code&
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/ Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration in
hours Continuous
Assessment
End Semester Total
GEM25
Communication
Skills in English
Practical
4 60 25 75 100 3
Topics and Allocation of Marks:
UNIT
TOPICS
HOURS
I Fundamental language skill 12
II Listening 12
III Reading 10
IV Speaking 12
V Writing 14
Total
60
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT TOPICS EXERCISES HOURS
I
Fundamental
Language Skills
1.Transformation of Sentences
Conversion of sentences
Statement into Interrogative
Statement into exclamatory
Statement into imperative
Page 92 of 260
2. Correction of Sentences
Identifying the errors in
the sentences
12
3. Homophones
Recognize and
distinguish words with
similar pronunciation
4. Answering Verbal Questions
Answering in affirmative
and Negative.
5. Clause, Simple, Compound
and Complex
Differentiate phrases
and clauses.
Identify the Main clause
and subordinate clause
II.Listening 6.Listening-I
7.Listening-II
Listening Activities – Day
to Day conversation,
short story, passages
Completion of
sentences, objective
type questions, etc
12
III Reading 8.Passage-I
9.Passage- II
Interpret and analyze
small passages.
Comprehend and
analyze passage
Comprehend and
respond to the passage
10
IV. Speaking 10.Pronunciation Introduction to
pronunciation-stress,
Intonation
Self-Introduction,
Introducing Friend and
family, Speaking on shot
topic
12
Page 93 of 260
V. Writing
11. Newspaper Report
Comprehension
12. Visual Description
13.Visual to Verbal
14. E-Mail
Respond and Interpret
to the given article from
the newspaper.
Describe the given
picture
Interpret visuals and
write paragraph using
linkers.
Compose e-mails
14
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
Sl.No Allocation Marks
1. Listening 15
2. Reading 15
3. Writing 35
4. Speaking 10
Total 75
Text Book :
Communication skills In English Practical, Ms.S.Rajalakshmi & Ms.S.Anandhi, Saravana Publishers
Reference Books:
1. Spoken English For You - level II,G.Radhakrishnan Pillai, Emerald Publisher.
2. Dr.l.Adhinarayanan,”Spoken English”, Neelakamal Publication Pvt. Ltd.,
3. DOTE Text Book ”Communication English I&II”, Government of Tamil Nadu.
Page 94 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C113.1
Identify and transform the sentence from one form to another and answer the given verbal questions
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 1 - 1
C113.2
Locate and rectify the error in the given sentence , identify the homophones and find the Main clause and subordinate clause in a sentence
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - 2
C113.3
Listen to different situational conversation and telephonic conversation and answer the given questions
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3 - 3
C113.4 Reading independently short passages, understand and find the answers for given questions
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - 2
C113.5
Find the correct pronunciation for the given words, learn stress and mark intonation in a sentence
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - 2
C113.6
Read and understand the Newspaper report to answer the given questions, develop the given visual into a paragraph and compose e-mail
- - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - 3
Total - - - - - - - - 18 18 - 12 - 13
Ave - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - 2.17
Page 95 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : II Subject Code& Name: GEM 26 Engineering Physics – II Practical Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code&
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration in
hours Continuous
Assessment
End Semester Total
GEM 26 Engineering Physics
– II Practical
2 30 25 75 100 3
RATIONALE:
In diploma level engineering education skill development plays a vital role. The skill development
can be achieved by on hand experience in handling various instruments, apparatus and equipment. This is
accomplished by doing engineering related experiments in practical classes in various laboratories.
List of Experiments with objectives:
1. REFRACTIVE INDEX To determine the refractive index of a transparent liquid (water) using travelling microscope.
2. SPECTROMETER To measure the angle of prism and the angle of minimum deviation of the prism using
Spectrometer and to calculate the refractive index of glass of the prism.
3. LAWS OF RESISTANCES. To verify the laws of resistances by connecting the two given standard resistances
(i) in series and (ii) in parallel, using Ohm’s law.
4. POTENTIOMETER. To compare the electro motive forces (e.m.fs) of the given two cells.
5. JOULE’S CALORIMETER. To determine the specific heat capacity of water.
6. COPPER VOLTAMETER. To determine the electro chemical equivalent (e.c.e.) of copper.
7. P-N JUNCTION DIODE. To draw the voltage – current characteristics in forward bias and to find the ‘dynamic forward resistance’ & ‘knee voltage’ from the graph
8. P N P TRANSISTOR. To draw the transfer characteristics of a PNP transistor in common emitter configuration
and to find the current gain from the graph.
9. LOGIC GATES.
To find the output conditions for different combinations of the input for NOT gate and 2 inputs AND, OR, NAND , NOR & XOR logic gates, using IC chips. ( IC 7404 –NOT Gate, IC 7408 – AND Gate, IC 7432 – OR gate, IC 7400 – NAND Gate, IC 7402 – NOR Gate &IC 7486 – XOR gate.)
Page 96 of 260
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
S.No Allocation Marks
1 Formula with Explanation 10
2 Figure/ Circuit Diagram with parts & Tabular column with proper
Units
15
3 Observations 35
4 Calculations 10
5 Result 05
Total 75
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C114.1
Determine the reflective index of
the given transparent liquid using
travelling microscope and to
calculate the refractive index of the
material of the prism using
spectrometer.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C114.2
Applying ohm’s law to verify the
law’s of resistances and to compare
the e.m.f. of given two cells using
potentiometer.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2 1 1
C114.3 Interpret the specific heat capacity
of water using Joule’s calorimeter. 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C114.4 Calculate e.c.e. of copper using
copper voltameter. 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C114.5
Find the dynamic forward resistance
and knee voltage for a diode and
base current amplification factor of
PNP transistor in CE configuration.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2 1 1
C114.6 Verify the output condition for
different combinations of one input
and two input logic gates.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2 1 1
Total 18 18 18 12 6 - - - - - 9 6 3 3
Ave
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2 1 1
Page 97 of 260
GEM 26 ENGINEERING PHYSICS - II PRACTICAL
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
3HOURS
1. Determine the refractive index of the given transparent liquid using travelling microscope.
2. Measure the angle of the prism and the angle of minimum deviation using spectrometer
and
Then calculate the refractive index of glass of the prism.
3. Verify the laws of resistances by connecting the two given standard resistances
(i) in series and (ii) in parallel, using Ohm’s law.
4. Compare the electro motive forces (e.m.fs) of the given two cells, using potentiometer.
5. Determine the specific heat capacity of water, using Joule’s calorimeter.
6. Determine the electro chemical equivalent (e.c.e.) of copper using Copper Voltameter.
7. Draw the voltage – current characteristics of a P-N junction diode in forward bias and
thenfind the ‘dynamic forward resistance’ & ‘knee voltage’ from the graph.
8. Draw the transfer characteristics of a P N P transistor in common emitter configuration and
find the ‘current gain’ from the graph.
9. Find the output conditions for different combinations of the input for NOT gate and 2 inputs
AND, OR, NAND, NOR & XOR logic gates using IC chips. ( IC 7404 –NOT Gate, IC 7408 –
AND Gate, IC 7432 – OR gate, IC 7400 – NAND Gate, IC 7402 – NOR Gate IC 7486 – XOR
gate. )
Page 98 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code& Name: GEM 27 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY-II PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code&
Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/ Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration in
hours Continuous
Assessment
End Semester
Examination
Total
GEM 27
Engineering
Chemistry-II
Practical
2
30
25
75
100
3
RATIONALE:
At the entry level of introducing practical subjects to Diploma Engineering it is important to
introduce chemistry practical where mainly constitution of different chemical is analysed through
Qualitative analysis. Qualitative analysis is introduced through simple salt analysis in the second
semester of the study.
Qualitative Analysis:
Study of the reactions of the following radicals leading to qualitative analysis of the
given chemical substance soluble in water or in dilute acids.
Acid radicals: Carbonate, Chloride, Nitrate and Sulphate.
Basic radicals: Lead, Cadmium, Copper, Aluminium, Zinc, Calcium, Barium, Magnesium and
ammonium salts.
Simple Salts to be analysed:
1. Lead carbonate
2. Lead nitrate
3. Aluminiumsulphate
4. Zinc carbonate
5. Zinc sulphate
6. Barium Chloride
7. Barium nitrate
8. Calcium carbonate
9. Magnesium sulphate
10. Ammonium chloride
11. Ammonium sulphate
Effluents to be analyzed:
1. Lead 3. Copper
2. Zinc 4. Cadmium
Page 99 of 260
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
S.no Allocation Marks
1 Acid Radical 23
2 Basic Radical 23
3 Report 04
4 Effluent Procedure 20
5 Harmful effects 05
Total 75
Reference Books:
Vogel – Analytical chemistry – Pearson publications. Dr.Sudha rani – Laboratory manual on engineering chemistry Dhanpat rai publications.
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C115.1 Explain the basics of qualitative Analysis as introduction
2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C115.2 Find the anion or acid radical present in the simple salt, by (salt analysis) qualitative analysis.
3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
C115.3 Identify the cation or basic radical present in the simple salt, by (salt analysis) qualitative analysis.
3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
C115.4 Infer the acid or basic radical by special tests called confirmatory tests.
2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
C115.5 Systematically analyse the given simple salt with the confirmatory tests for anion and cation.
3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - -
C115.6 Test the effluents systematically with the help of confirmatory tests
3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
Total 16 16 16 16 10 - - - - - - 1 - 1
Ave 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 1.6 - - - - - - 1 - 1
Page 100 of 260
GEM 27 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY II PRACTICAL
MODEL QUESTION PAPER 3Hours
1. Analyse the given Inorganic simple salt and report the acid radical and basic radical present in it
with a complete procedure.
2. Analyse the given sample of effluent and report the metallic pollutant present in it with
procedure and its harmful Effects.
Page 101 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code& Name: GEM28 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS II PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code
& Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration
in hours Continuous
Assessment
End Semester
Examination
Total
GEM28
Engineering
Graphics II
Practical
6
90
25
75
100
3
Topics and Allocation of Hours
Topics Details Hours
a) Section of Solids.(Manual Drafting and Computer Aided Drafting) 20
b) Development of surfaces.(Manual Drafting and ComputerAided Drafting) 20
c) Orthographic projection.(Manual Draftingand Computer Aided Drafting) 25
d) Isometric projections .(Manual Drafting and ComputerAided Drafting) 25
Total 90
RATIONALE:
We imagine the machine component or structure to be cut by a plane or planes so that
most of the details could be seen. The exterior shape of objects like a connecting rod with elliptical
configuration can be conveniently shown by using sectional views. The components parts of a
machine and their relative positions will be revealed by the sectionals view of the machine.
The exact size and shape of the sheet to be cut is given by the development of the object
concerned. Most of the sheet metal works in engineering industries involve the development of
surfaces of solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, pyramids, cones and spheres with or without cuts
and slots. It is essential that sheet metal technicians have a thorough knowledge of preparing
developments of various types of surfaces.
Page 102 of 260
Orthographic projection is possible to describe the shape of any object completely by using
orthographic projections. These orthographic views are required for the manufacture of object
and machine parts .Hence it is necessary to study orthographic projections.
One such system of projection is isometric projection which is a type of pictorial projection
showing the three dimensions of an object in one view. Isometric view has the distinct advantage
of conveying the real shape of the object in such a way that even those who are not familiar with
the art of reading a drawing can easily visualize its form and shape.
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Topics Details Hours
a)
Section of Solids.(Manual Drafting and Computer Aided Drafting)
Introduction – Section planes – apparent section- true section -
sectional view - need for sectional view - cutting plane- cutting
plane line.
Section of solids in simple positions with axis parallel to one plane
and perpendicular to other plane, Section of solids when axis of
the solid parallel to both planes-Section plane parallel to one plane
and perpendicular to other plane-Section plane perpendicular to
one plane and Inclined to other plane- showing true shape of
section- exercises: section of simple solids: prism, pyramid,
cylinder and cone.
20
b)
Development of surfaces. (Manual Drafting and Computer ided
Drafting)
Development of prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone-
Development of frustum of prisms, pyramids and cone-
Development of truncated prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone –
exercises.
Development of T-pipe, elbow, duct, tray, lamp shade and funnel-
exercises.
20
c)
Orthographic projection (Manual Drafting and Computer Aided
Drafting)
Introduction – projection terms – Orthographic projection – Co-
ordinate planes of projection – Systems of orthographic projection
– First angle Orthographic projection – Third angle Orthographic
projection -Comparison of first and third angle projections.
Projection of three views (Elevation, Plan and Side view) of simple
objects using first angle projection only – Free hand sketch
practice – exercises.
25
Page 103 of 260
d)
Isometric projections (Manual Drafting and Computer Aided
Drafting)
Introduction – isometric view – isometric projection – difference
between isometric view and isometric projection – isometric scale
– methods of drawing an isometric
view – box method. Angles in Isometric view – irregular curves in
isometric drawing – circles in isometric method – four centre
method for drawing an ellipse – arcs of circles in
isometric – Draw the isometric view of the object from the given
orthographic view– exercises.
25
Text Books:
1. GEM 28 Engineering Graphics-II, Murugappa Polytechnic College, 2016
Reference Books:
1. Gill P.S., “Engineering drawings”, S.K.Kataria& Sons.
2. Bhat N.D. “Engineering drawings”, Charotar Publishing house.
3. Gopalakrishnan.K.R., “Engineering drawing”, (Vol.I and vol.II), Dhanalakshmipublishers, Ed.2,
1970.
4. Venugopal.K,Sreekanjana G, “Engineering Graphics” New Age International Publishers.
5. K V Nataraajan “A Text Book of Engineering drawing.
LIST OF EXERCISES:
a) Section of solids : 1.Exercise on Manual Drawing 2. Exercise on CAD
b) Development of surfaces : 3.Exercise on Manual Drawing 4. Exercise on CAD
c) Orthographic projection : 5.Exercise on Manual Drawing 6. Exercise on Manual Drawing
7. Exercise on CAD
8. Exercise on CAD
d) Isometric projection : 9. Exercise on Manual Drawing 10. Exercise on Manual Drawing
11. Exercise on CAD
12. Exercise on CAD
Page 104 of 260
REQUIREMENTS:
Drawing Tables and Computers with AutoCAD software packages
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
Question No. Allocation
Marks
Manual CAD
1. Section of solids (either or type) 7 8
2. Development of Surfaces 8 7
3. Orthographic projection 10 10
4. Isometric Projection 15 10
Total 40 35
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C116.1
Interpret the cutting of simple solids by sectional plane and know the internal Details of the cut solids.
1 - 2 3 - - - - - - - - - -
C116.2
Understand and apply the concept of surface Development for fabricating simple objects.
1 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
C116.3
Understand and apply the concept of First angle orthographic projection of simple 3D objects.
- - 3 2 - - - - 1 - - - - -
C116.4
Create the image of three Dimension simple objects with the help of Isometric projection
1 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
C116.5 Use CAD tools and make basic Engineering drawings.
1 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
Total 4 2 11 12 - - - - 1 - - 2 2 1
Ave 1 2 2.75 2.4 - - - - 1 - - 2 2 1
Page 105 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : II
Subject Code& Name: GEM 29 WORKSHOP PRACTICE
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code
& Name
Instructions Examination
Hours/
Week
Hours /
Semester
Marks Duration
in hours Continuous
Assessment
End Semester
Examination
Total
GEM 18
Workshop
Practice
3
45
25
75
100
3
RATIONALE:
Workshop practice is a basic subject for all branches of Diploma Engineering. This subject is aimed
at providing basic understanding of the fundamentals of practical sections; mainly planning,
marking, cutting, filing, wiring connections, standards &conventions of wiring, the tools, the use of
measuring instruments in engineering applications and plumbing tools and practices.
The topics covered are based on the syllabus for Diploma studies in engineering. The subject is
planned to include sufficient practices which would help the student to understand the principles
of manufacturing.
WORKSHOP PRACTICE
1. FITTING SECTION 15 HRS.
General safety precaution inside the workshop.
Study about first aid.
Study of hand tools
Study of instruments- Calipers -Scale – Vernier caliper – Vernier height gauge.
Marking and punching practice.
Hacksaw cutting practice.
Filing and fitting practice.
Drilling and tapping practice.
Page 106 of 260
Exercises
Raw material: 3mm thick M.S. flat
1. Single piece cutting and filing
2. L-Joint
3. V-Joint
4. Drilling and tapping (Four drills and Two with Taps) Raw material: 10mm thick M.S. flat
Note:
Practices should be given to cover the above area. At the end, the students should be able to do
the above exercises for the autonomous practical examinations. Students should mention the
variations in the dimensions of their exercises.
2. WIRING & SOLDERING 15 HRS
Study about the safety measures in wiring and soldering.
Study of tools for wiring and soldering.
Study about the earthing.
Identify different electrical fitting and accessories.
Identify the types of wires with colour code.
Identify the symbols in circuit diagram.
Practice simple wiring.
Uses of multimeter. Exercises
WIRING
1.Two lamps connected in series and parallel measure and check the voltage and current using multimeter.
2.Staircase wiring. SOLDERING PRACTICE
1. Parallel joint 2. ST - Joint
Note:
Students should draw the circuit diagram and joint diagram & collect the components according to
their requirement. Only components should be given to the students. The connection should be
given from the main switch. Suitable safety precautions should be made before connections.
3. PLUMBING 15 HRS
Plumbing is the skilled trade of working with pipes, tubing and plumbing fixtures for drinking
water systems and the drainage of waste.
The plumbing industry is a basic and substantial part of every developed economy due to the need for clean water, and proper collection and transport of wastes.
Plumbing also refers to a system of pipes and fixtures installed in a building for the distribution of potable water and the removal of waterborne wastes.
Plumbing is usually distinguished from water and sewage systems, in that a plumbing system serves one building, while water and sewage systems serve a group of buildings
or a city.
Page 107 of 260
To install pipes and fixtures.
To repair or replace all kinds of leaks.
Use personal protective equipments. Exercises
1. Install a sink / washbasin with tap using different PVC/GI pipe accessories such as bend, tee and
gate valve.
2. Cutting, bending and external threading of GI pipes using Die.
3. Repair a leakage in the water tap and fix water meter.
4. Lay pipes to install rain water harvesting.
The students should be given training in all the sections. All the exercises should be completed.
The students should maintain record notebook for the concerned trades and submit during the
Autonomous Practical Examinations.
Page 108 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 P06 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C117.1 Identify safety measures to be taken while working in fitting, plumbing & wiring.
2 1 2 1 - - 1 3 - 1 - 1 - 1
C117.2 Summarize the tools & instruments required fitting & plumbing section.
1 1 2 1 - - 1 3 - 1 - - -
C117.3 Identify different electrical fitting & accessories and symbols in electrical circuit diagrams.
2 1 2 1 - - 1 3 - 1 - 2 - 1
C117.4 Carryout the cutting & filing work for making different joints
2 1 3 3 - - 1 3 - 1 - - -
C117.5 Produce through hole & tapped holes, use drill and tap
2 1 3 3 - - 1 3 - 1 - - -
C117.6 Design electrical circuits for two lamps connected in series and parallel check voltage and Current
2 1 3 3 - - 1 3 - 1 - 3 - 1
Total 11 6 15 12 - - 6 18 - 6 - 6 - 3
Ave 1.83 1 2.5 2 - - 1 3 - 1 - 2 - 1
Page 109 of 260
WORKSHOP PRACTICE
AUTONOMOUS PRACTICAL EXAMINATION
Note: Any two exercises should be carried out for examination. Fitting is compulsory anyone
exercise form wiring& Soldering or plumbing. All the exercises should be given in the
questionpaper and students are allowed to select by a lot.
Students should have liberty to do the examination for 3 Hrs. No fixed time for each trade. The
number of instrument / equipment facility should be available for each batch strength during
examination.
Max. Marks
Fitting (Compulsory) 35
Marking & Cutting - 10
Filing / Dimensions - 20
Joint / Finish - 5
Wiring & Soldering 35
Circuit diagram/Joint making - 15
Connection & Checking /Soldering - 15
Result - 5
(OR)
Plumbing 35
Preparation of material - 15
Connection / Testing - 15
Result - 5
Viva-voce 05
TOTAL 75
---------------------------------------------------------
Page 110 of 260
Course Name: DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM 31 ELECRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM31 Electronic
Devices and Circuits
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks
Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Semiconductor and Diodes 14
II Bipolar Junction Transistor 14
III Transistor Oscillators , FET and UJT 14
IV SCR, TRIAC, DIAC and MOSFET 14
V Opto Electronics Devices and wave shaping circuits 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 111 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
SEMICONDUCTOR AND DIODES
Semiconductor –Definition, Classification, Intrinsic and Extrinsic N type & P
type -Drift current & Diffusion current Diodes-PN junction diode-Forward
and Reverse bias characteristics -Specification-Zener diode-Construction &
working principle-Characteristics-Zener break down-Avalanche break
down-Zener diode as a voltage regulator - Applications-Specifications-78XX
& 79XX – pin details- operation.
Rectifier-Introduction-Classification of Rectifiers-Half wave rectifier- Full
wave rectifier , Bridge rectifier – TUF,PIV, Efficiency , Ripple factor
(Definitions only) – comparison - Applications – Filters – L,C, LC, and PI
Filter.
14
II
BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR Transistor – NPN and PNP transistor – operation- Transistor as an amplifier – Transistor biasing – Fixed bias, Collector base bias, Self bias – CB, CE, CC Configurations – Characteristics – Comparison between three configurations in terms of input impedance, Output impedence, Current gain, Voltage gain – RC coupled amplifier – Load characteristic analysis (AC & DC) - Classification of amplifiers –class A,class B,class C,class AB, push pull and complementary symmetry– Emitter follower and its application – Negative feedback – Basic concept, effect of negative feedback, Types of Negative feedback connections – Transistor as a switch.
14
III
TRANSISTOR OSCILLATORS, FET and UJT Transistor oscillator – Classifications – Condition for oscillations (Barkhausen criterion) – General form of LC oscillator – Hartley Oscillator – Colpitts Oscillator – RC Phase shift oscillator, Crystal oscillator. Field Effect Transistor – Construction – Working principle of FET – Difference between FET and BJT –classification of FET-Characteristics of FET-FET Classifications – Applications – FET amplifier(Common source amplifier). Uni Junction Transistor – Construction – Equivalent circuit – Operation – Characteristics – UJT as a relaxation oscillator.
14
IV
SCR, TRIAC, DIAC AND MOSFET SCR – Introduction – Working – Two transistor analogy of SCR –Applications V.I. Characteristics – Specifications.-SCR as a switch, Controlled rectifier (Bridge). TRIAC – Basic working principle – Characteristics – Speed control of fan using DIAC and TRIAC-application. DIAC – Construction – working – characteristics – DIAC as Bi-directional switch-application.MOSFET –Types-N-channel and P-channel Construction –enhancement and Depletion mode MOSFET – MOSFET as a switch and applications.
14
Page 112 of 260
V
OPTO ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND WAVESHAPING CIRCUITS Classification of opto electric devices – symbols characteristics of LDR, LED, 7 Segment LED, LCD, Opto coupler, Opto interrupter – Infrared transmitter and receiver - Laser diode(Simple treatment) – Solar cell – Avalanche Photo diode - Photo transistor. Clipper, Clamper– Voltage doublers, IC 555 – pin details, Astable multivibrator,Bistable Multivibrator- Monostable Multivibrator using IC 555 – Schmitt Trigger.
14
Text Books:
1. Boylstead, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Publication, Fifth edition 2. V.K.Mehta , Principle of Electronics, S.Chand & Company Ltd. 3. Sallaivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj Electronics Devices & Circuits, Tata
McGraw Publication. 3rdEdition 2016. Reference Books: 1. Malvino, Electronics principles, Tata McGraw Publication,2010. 2. Allen Mottershed, Electronics Devices & Circuits, Tata McGraw – Hill Publication, 2010. 3. Jacob Millman and Halkias, Electronics Devices & Circuits, Tata McGraw – Hill Publication. 3rd Edition 2010.
4. Gerd Keise, Optical Fiber Communication. 5thEdition, Tata McGraw– Hill Publication
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C201.1 Explain the characteristics of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 2 1 1 1
C201.2 Explain the working principle of PN junction diode, Zener diode, rectifiers and regulators.
3 3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 3
C201.3 Describe the concept of different types of amplifiers and biasing techniques.
3 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 3
C201.4 Describe the working principle of oscillators, FET & UJT.
3 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 3
C201.5 Analyze the characteristics of SCR, DIAC,TRIAC and MOSFET in a circuit
3 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 3
C201.6 Utilize various optoelectronic devices and different types of waveshaping circuits.
3 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 3 3 2 3
Total 18 18 18 4 6 - - - - 12 17 16 11 16
Ave 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 2.83 2.67 1.83 2.67
Page 113 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM31 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Define Cut-in voltage 2. Define Regulator 3. Name the different configurations of Transistor 4. What is Positive feedback? 5. What are the types of LC Oscillator? 6. What are the advantages of FET 7. Draw the symbol of SCR and name the terminals 8. State the application of TRIAC 9. List the types of multivibrator? 10. State the materials used for making LED.
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Describe the operation of Zener diode as a voltage regulator 12. Discuss the operation of “C” filter.
UNIT - II
13. With neat sketch explain the operation of NPN transistor. 14. Explain the Emitter follower with neat diagram.
UNIT - III
15. List the difference between JFET and Bipolar Transistor. 16. Draw only the circuit diagram of Hartley Oscillator.
UNIT - IV
17. How DIAC works as a bidirectional switch? 18. List the difference between JFET and MOSFET
UNIT - V
19. Describe the working principle of LED. 20. Describe the principle operation of solar cell.
Page 114 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT – I
21. Explain the operation of PN junction diode with its characteristics curve. (10) 22. Explain the operation of Full wave rectifier and draw its Input /Output wave forms.(10)
UNIT - II
23. (i) Compare three different configuration of transistor. (5) (ii)Explain fixed bias in a transistor. (5)
24. Explain the operation of RC coupled amplifier and draw its frequency response (10)
UNIT - III
25. (i)Discuss about the conditions for Oscillation (6) (ii) Draw only the circuit diagram of RC phase shift oscillator. (4)
26. Explain the working principle of JFET and draw its characteristics. (10) UNIT – IV
27. (i) Explain the operation of DIAC with its characteristics. (6) (ii) Explain only the construction detail of MOSFET. (4)
28. With neat sketch explain the working principle of SCR and draw its transistor analogy of SCR. (10)
UNIT - V
29. (i)Explain the operation of opto interrupter. (4) (ii)Explain the operation of avalanche photodiode. (6)
30. Explain the operation of Astable Multivibrator and draw its output waveform. (10)
Page 115 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM32 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM32 Electrical Circuits and
Instrumentation
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I D.C. Circuits and Theorems 14
II A.C. Circuits and Resonance 14
III Transformers and Machines 14
IV Measuring Instruments and CRO 14
V Recorders, Transducers & Test Instruments 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 116 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
D.C. CIRCUITS AND THEOREMS Definition and unit for voltage, current, power, resistance, conductance, resistivity – ohm’s law – only simple problems in ohm’s law- Kirchhoff’s current law and voltage law. Series circuits –parallel circuits – series parallel circuits –Mesh method(simple problems) Thevenin’s, Norton’s, super position and Maximum power transfer theorem – Statement and explanation (simple problems – two sources with four resistors)
14
II
A.C. CIRCUITS AND RESONANCE AC through single pure resistance, pure inductance, pure capacitance - voltage and current relationship - and the equation for power and power factor in each case (only simple problems). Definition for impedance, reactance, admittance, conductance, phase angle, power factor and power. AC circuits – Derivation for impedance and admittance, power and power factor in Series and Parallel- RL, RC, and RLC circuits. –Analysis of Parallel RL circuit, RC circuit, RLC circuit (qualitative treatment only). Resonance: series resonance – parallel resonance - condition for resonance – resonant frequency- Q factor - resonance curve - bandwidth (only simple problems).
14
III
TRANSFORMERS AND MACHINES Transformer – Ideal transformer – construction - working principle –EMF equation -Losses in transformer- core loss, copper loss- Efficiency- Regulation- OC, SC test on transformer -List of applications (qualitative treatment only ) D.C. Machines – DC Generator –Working principle - Types- Applications - DC motor- working principle - types-applications (qualitative treatment only ) Single phase Induction motor-Types- construction & principle of operation of capacitor start induction motor- Applications- stepper motor-working principle-uses (qualitative treatment only).
14
IV
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND CRO Definition for measurement, instrument, errors in measuring instruments calibration,Indicating instruments – Basic forces for indicating instruments-construction and operation of Permanent magnet moving coil Instrument-Advantages –Disadvantages of PMMC -Shunts and Multipliers– DC ammeter-DC volt meter-volt meter sensitivity. Bridges- Types - Wheat stone bridge -applications -Universal impedance bridge arrangements to measure R, L,C CRO- Block diagram and principle of operation of CRO- operation of CRT -Electrostatic focusing- Electrostatic deflection (no derivation )- Block diagram of vertical deflection system- Applications of CRO Types of CRO- Block diagram and operation of dual trace CRO- dual beam CRO –comparison between dual trace and dual beam CRO – Digital storage oscilloscope –Block diagram- advantages, Block diagram - working principle of Function generator
14
Page 117 of 260
V
RECORDERS, TRANSDUCERS, SENSORS &TEST INSTRUMENTS Recorders – Types- X-Y recorder (Definition only) ,Strip chart recorder (Definition only)– list of applications - comparison between X-Y recorder and strip chart recorder Transducers –classification of transducer -Strain gauge - Types-uses-Construction, operation and applications of photo electric transducer, LVDT and Load cell. Principle of working of Thermocouple- Temperature measurement using thermocouple – list of applications-Principle of working of Thermistor –Temperature measurement using Thermistor –Types(NTC,PTC) RTD – List of applications .Test instruments- Digital voltmeter –Types (to list only) - Basic block diagram of DVM– Block diagram of Digital multimeter- Advantages over analog instruments-Block diagram of Digital frequency counter.-Simple PC based Data Acquisition System-Block diagram SENSORS: IR range sensor – IR proximity sensor – Ultrasonic range sensor – Touch sensor.
14
Text Books:
1. B.LTheraja, A text book of Electrical Technology, Publication Division of Nirja Constructions & Development co.(P) Ltd., 2008 Edition
2. Dr.M.Arumugam, N.Premkumaran, Electric circuit theory 3. A.K.Sawheney, Electrical and Electronic-Measurements and Instrumentation, Dhanpatrai &
sons – 1993
Reference Books:
1. Ernest O.Doebelin, Measurement systems – Application & Design, MC Graw hill 2004 2. Albert D.Hel Frick & William David Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation &
Measurement techniques, prentice hall of India pvt. Ltd., 1996
Page 118 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C202.1
Able to understand the fundamental concepts of voltage,current, resonance
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
C202.2
Able to understand the fundamental concepts of Ohm’s Law, KCL ,KVL Norton’s,superposition, thevenin’s ,Maximum power transfer theorems . Series circuits parallel circuits ,series parallel circuits.
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 3 2
C202.3
Understand the concept of A.C. circuits , RL, RC, and RLC circuits .Impedance, reactance, admittance, conductance, phase angle, power factor and power..
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2
C202.4
Become familiar with the concepts of transformers , DC machine and stepper motor. Single phase Induction motor-Types- construction & principle of operation of capacitor start induction motor.
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
C202.5
Review the basics of design of analog and digital circuits used in electronic instrumentation. Identify the different parts and Types of CRO. DC ammeter-DC volt meter, Bridges and its Types .
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
C202.6
To obtain the broad knowledge about the concepts of recorders and classification of transducers, LVDT , Load cell, Thermistor and its types .
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 18 12 10 6 - - - - 12
3 3 3 3
Ave
3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 2.83 2.83 2.83 2.67
Page 119 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM32 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Define voltage. 2. State Ohm’s law. 3. What is meant by resonance? 4. Define impedance. 5. What are the various losses in a transformer? 6. What are applications of stepper motor? 7. What is shunt? 8. List out the types of damping. 9. What is a recorder? 10. What is meant by transducer?
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Find the equivalent resistance when three resistances are connected in parallel 12. State KVL and KCL.
UNIT - II
13. Compare series and parallel resonance 14. Derive the Q-factor of parallel resonant circuit
UNIT - III
15. Write short notes on back EMF with diagram. 16. Describe the working of stepper motor with diagram.
UNIT - IV
17. What are the applications of CRO? 18. Compare Dual trace and dual beam CRO
UNIT - V
19. Compare strip chart recorder and X-Y recorder. 20. List out the applications of photo electric transducer.
Page 120 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I
21. Write step by step procedure to find out the current by Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem (10)
22. Find the current through the 6Ω resistor by using superposition theorem (10)
UNIT - II
23. Derive an expression for the impedance, phase angle, power factor and power in R-L-C series circuit. (10)
24. A series circuit has R=10Ω, L=50mh and c=100micro farad and supplied with 200v, 50hz. Find impedance, current, power, power factor, voltage drop across each element. (10)
UNIT – III 25. Explain the constructional details of a transformer. (10) 26. Explain the principle and working of capacitor start induction motor. (10)
UNIT – IV 27. Explain with diagram the construction and working of PMMC instrument? (10) 28. Explain with neat sketch construction and working of dual beam CRO. (10)
UNIT - V
29. Explain the operation of strip chart recorder with a neat diagram. (10) 30. Explain the construction and working of LVDT with neat diagram. (10)
Page 121 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM33 ANALOG & DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject
Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM33 Analog
&Digital
Electronics
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semeste
r
Marks Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Number System, Boolean Algebra and Reduction
Techniques
14
II Combinational Circuits and Logic Families 14
III Sequential Circuits & Semiconductor Memories 14
IV Introduction to Operational Amplifier & its Applications 14
V D/A and A/D Converters 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 122 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
NUMBER SYSTEM BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND REDUCTION TECHNIQUES Binary, Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal - Conversion from one to another. Binary codes – BCD code, Gray code, Excess code and ASCII code. Boolean Algebra – Boolean postulates and laws. De-Morgan’s theorem, Simplification of Boolean expressions using K- map(up to 4-variables-pairs,quad,octets)- Don’t care conditions and constructing the logic circuits for the Boolean expressions LOGIC GATES: AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EXOR, EX-NOR. Implementation of logic functions using gates, Realization of gates using universal gates. Simplification of expression using Boolean techniques, Boolean expression for outputs.
14
II
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS AND LOGIC FAMILIES Arithmetic circuits. Binary – Addition, subtraction, 1’s and 2’s complement. Signed binary numbers. Half Adder and Full Adder/ half Subtractor and Full Subtractor. Encoder, Decoder- 3 to 8 decoder, BCD to seven segment decoder. Multiplexer/Demultiplexer. BCD adder, parity checker and generator. Digital logic families – TTL Logic, CMOS logic comparison of TTL & CMOS logics and their characteristics and its applications.
14
III
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS & SEMI CONDUCTOR MEMORIES FLIP-FLOPS – SR, JK, T, D, JK- MS FF, Triggering of FF – edge & level. COUNTERS – Asynchronous/ripple counter, Decade counter, mod3, mod7 counter, Synchronous Up & Down counter (4 bit Synchronous counter Up/Down), Johnson counter, Ring counter, Single digit BCD counter. REGISTERS: - 4-bit shift register- Serial IN Serial OUT, Serial IN parallel OUT, Parallel IN Serial OUT, Parallel IN Parallel OUT. MEMORIES: Classification of memories, RAM organization - Address Lines and Memory Size, Read/write operations, Static RAM - Bipolar RAM cell, Dynamic RAM. Read only memory – ROM organization, Expanding memory, and PROM, EPROM, and EEPROM .Flash memory.
14
IV
INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER & ITS APPLICATIONS Integrated circuit - Classification of IC - Advantages of IC over discrete components –Types of IC Packages – Operational amplifier IC 741 – Schematic symbol for op-amp – pin diagram of IC 741 – Block diagram of an op-amp – Characteristics of an Ideal op-amp –modes of operation of op-amp- Simple Equivalent circuit of an op-amp – virtual ground – op-amp parameters – CMRR –Slew rate Basic linear circuits- Inverting Amplifier, Non Inverting amplifier – Differential Amplifier – sign changer – scale changer. OP-AMP APPLICATIONS: Summing amplifier –subtractor- Multiplier – Divider – Voltage follower –Comparator – Integrator – Differentiator –Instrumentation amplifier Waveform generators – square wave, sine wave generators.
14
V
D/A AND A/D CONVERTERS Digital to analog converter – Basics of D/A conversion – weighted Resistor D/A Converter – R-2R Ladder D/A Converter –Specifications of DAC-Accuracy, Resolution, Monotonocity, Settling time. Analog to digital converter – Basics of A/D conversion – – Specifications of ADC – Accuracy, Resolution, conversion
Page 123 of 260
time –Functional Block diagram of IC ADC 0808.sampling –Sample and hold circuit – quantization – Types of A/D converter – Block diagram of Flash, Successive approximation, Ramp, Dual Slope ADC .
14
Text Books:
1. K.Meena ,Principles of digital electronics, PHI – 2011
2. R.P. Jain , Modern Digital Electronics, TMH
3. LinearIntegrated circuits– D.Roychoudhury&Shail.B. Jain– Newage
International Publishers – II Edition – 2004.
Reference Books:
1. Albert Paul Malvino & Donald P.Leach , Digital principles & Applications, TMH. 2. William H.Gothmann, Digital Electronics, prentice Hall of India. 3. William Kleitz, Digital Electronics A Practical Approach, Prentice Hall. 4. “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integratedcircuits”- Ramakant .A
Gayakwad ,Prentice Hall – 2000.
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C203.1 State the different types of number systems and Boolean algebra
3 3 3 - - - 2 2 2 3 3 3 - 3
C203.2
Discuss the different types of logic gates and solve the equations using Boolean techniques & K-map
3 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 2 - -
C203.3 Describe the working principle of combinational circuits and logic families.
3 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
C203.4 Explain the working principle of sequential circuits and semiconductor memories.
3 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
C203.5 Classify the different types of operational amplifiers and its applications.
3 3 3 2 3 - - - 2 3 3 3 3 3
C203.6 Explain the working principle of different types of A/D and D/A converters with its characteristics
3 3 3 - 2 - - - 2 3 3 3 3 3
Total 18 16 16 2 5 - 8 8 12 18 3 3 3 3
Ave
3 2.67 2.67 2 2.5 - 2 2 2 3 2.83 2.83 3 3
Page 124 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75 Subject Code & Name: ECM33 ANALOG & DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any TWO Questions from each Unit in PART-B (4 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Convert (FFFF) H to (X)D. 2. Convert (110110001)2 to gray code. 3. Define Parity. 4. How does an encoder differ from a decoder? 5. What is Mod-N counter? 6. Expand DDRAM. 7. Draw the pin details of an Op-Amp. 8. Define CMRR 9. Define sampling. 10. List out the specification of DAC.
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Simplify: 12. State and explain De-Morgan’s theorem.
UNIT – II
13. Draw a full adder circuit using two half adder. 14. Describe the operation of de-multiplexer.
UNIT – III 15. Draw the logic diagram of Johnson counter. 16. Write a note on EEPROM.
UNIT – IV 17. List the Characteristics of an Ideal Op-Amp 18. How an Op-Amp as worked as Multiplier
UNIT – V
19. Write a note on sampling & hold circuit. 20. Draw the block diagram of IC ADC 0808
Page 125 of 260
Part C (10x5=50) UNIT – I
21. Define universal gate and explain how NAND Gate is used as a universal gate. (10)
22. Simplify the given Boolean function by using karnaugh map and stimulate its output. (10) F=∑ (0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14).
UNIT – II
23. Draw and explain the working principle of BCD to 7 segment decoder. (10) 24. i) Explain the operation of TTL circuit with neat diagram. (5) ii) List out the characteristics of digital logic family. (5)
UNIT – III
25. i) Explain the operation of MS-JK flip flop with diagram &excitation table. (6) ii) What do you mean by edge triggering? (4)
26. Explain the operation of ROM with neat diagram. (10)
UNIT – IV
27. Explain the operation of Op-Amp With a neat block diagram. (10) 28. Explain the operation of Non-Inverting Amplifier using Op-Amp. (10)
UNIT – V
29. Explain about the operation of R-2R ladder with neat diagram. (10) 30. Explain the operation dual slope ADC with neat sketch. (10)
Page 126 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM34 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM34 Electronic Devices and Circuits Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semeste
r
Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Identify and check the working condition of passive & active components, switches
&SMDs.
2. Construct and plot the V.I. characteristics of PN junction diode and find the cut-in voltage.
3. Construct and plot the V.I. characteristics of Zener diode and find the break down
Voltage.. Construct and plot the regulation characteristics (by varying either load or line
voltage) of Half wave and Full wave rectifier with and without filters
4. Construct and plot the regulation characteristics (by varying either load or line voltage) of
Bridge rectifier with and without filters.
5. Construct and draw the Input and output characteristics of CE Transistor configuration
and find its input & output resistance.
6. Construct and draw the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier and determine the 3-
db Bandwidth.Construct and plot RC phase shift oscillator and find its frequency of
oscillation by varying either R or C.
7. Construct and plot the drain characteristics of JFET and find its pinch off voltage.
8. Construct and plot UJT characteristics and find its Ip and Vv.
9. Construct and draw SCR characteristics and find its break over voltage.
10. Construct and plot the DIAC and TRIAC characteristics.
11. Construct a positive and negative diode clipper and draw the output waveforms.
12. Construct positive and Negative diode clampers and draw the output waveforms
13. Construct and draw LDR characteristics.
14. Construct and plot the V.I. characteristics of Photo transistor.
15. Construct Astable multivibrator using IC 555 draw the output waveform and also find its
Frequency.
Page 127 of 260
List of Equipments:
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1 DC Regulated power supply 0-30V, 1A 8
2. High Voltage Power Supply 0-250V, 1A 2
3. Function Generator 1MHz or3MHz 3
4. Dual trace CRO 20 MHz / 30MHz 4
5. DC Voltmeter (Analog/Digital) Different Ranges 10
6. Digital Multi meter - 10
7. DC Ammeter (Analog/Digital) Different Ranges 10
8. Decade Resistance Box - 2
Reference:
Lab manual, “Electronic Devices and Circuits Practical”, MPC.D.7.09.ECM34.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Circuit Diagram 25
2 Connection & Handling the Equipment 20
3 Tabulation& Graph 15
4 Result 10
5 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 128 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C204.1
Construct and test the characteristics of PN junction diode, Zener diode and voltage regulator.
3 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C204.2
Construct and calculate the input and output resistance of CE transistor configuration.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C204.3
Construct and determine the 3-db bandwidth of RC coupled amplifier.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
C204.4
Construct and test the RC phase shift oscillator by either varying R or C and calculate the frequency of oscillation.
3 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
C204.5
Draw the drain characteristics of FET and identify its pinch off voltage
1 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
C204.6
Construct and test the characteristics of UJT, SCR, DIAC, and TRIAC & LDR.
2 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C204.7
Construct and test the performance of clipper, clamper and Astable multivibrators using IC 555.
1 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Total 16 21 20 14 4 - 2 21 14 14 14 14 14 14
Ave 2.17 3 2.83 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 2.17 2.17 2.17 2
Page 129 of 260
Course Name: DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM35 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND INSTRUMENTATION
PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM35 Electrical
Circuits and
Instrumentation
Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Construct a circuit to verify ohm’s law
2. Construct a circuit to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage and current law
3. Construct a circuit to verify superposition theorem
4. Construct a circuit to verify Thevenin’s Theorem
5. Construct a circuit to verify Norton’s Theorem
6. Construct a circuit to verify maximum power transfer Theorem
7. Construct and test the performance of series resonant circuit and parallel resonant circuit
8. Calibrate the given ammeter and voltmeter
9. Extend the range of given voltmeter and ammeter
10. Construct and test the performance of Wheatstone bridge.
11. Measure the amplitude and frequency of signals using dual trace CRO.
12. Measure the frequency and phase angle using CRO by Lissajous figure.
13. Measure voltage and current using CRO.
14. Test the performance of LVDT.
15. Measure strain using strain gauge.
16. Test the performance of a load cell.
17. Determine the characteristics of a Thermistor.
18. Construct and test the performance of photoelectric transducer.
Page 130 of 260
List of Equipments
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1 DC Regulated power supply 0-30V, 1A 8
2 Function generators
1MHZ
3
3. Dual trace CRO
20MHZ
4
4. DC Ammeter (0-100mA) 6
5. DC Voltmeter (0-15)V 8
6. Digital Multi meter - 10
7. DC Ammeter (0-300µA) 6
8. Galvanometer
- 1
9. Decade Resistance Box
- 3
10 LVDT trainer kit - 1
11 Strain gauge trainer kit - 1
Reference:
Lab manual, “Electrical Circuits and Instrumentation Practical”, MPC.D.7.09.ECM35
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Circuit Diagram 25
2 Connection & Handling the Equipment 20
3 Tabulation/ Calculation / Graph 15
4 Result 10
5 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 131 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C205.1
Construct and test ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s voltage and current law.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
C205.2
Construct and test the super position theorem, Thevenin’s, Norton’s Theorem & maximum power transfer Theorem.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
C205.3
Construct and test the performance of series resonant circuit and parallel resonant circuit.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C205.4
Calibrate the given ammeter and voltmeter and extend the range of given voltmeter and ammeter.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
C205.5
Measure the amplitude and frequency of signals using dual trace CRO and phase angle using CRO by Lissajous figure.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
C205.6
Test the performance of LVDT, load cell, photo electric transducer
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C205.7
Test the performance of strain using strain gauge.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
Total 21 21 21 14 - - - 21 14 14 16 14 14 13
Ave 3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2.33 2 2 2
Page 132 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM36 ANALOG & DIGITAL ELECTRONICS PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM36 Analog &
Digital Electronics
Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Note:
1. At least 10 experiments should be constructed using Breadboard/Soldering 2. Different Parameters should be given for EACH batch of students.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Verification of truth table of OR, AND, NOT, NOR, NAND, EX-OR gates.
2. Realization of basic gates using NAND and NOR gates.
3. Realization of logic circuit for a given Boolean expression.
4. Construct and verify the truth table of half adder, Full adder using IC’s.
5. Construct and verify the truth table of Half Subtractor, Full subtractor using IC’s.
6. Verify the truth table of Decoder using IC 74138.
7. Verify the truth table of Encoder using IC 74148.
8. Verify the truth table of Multiplexer/Demultiplexeur using CMOS IC4051.
9. Test the performance of Parity generator and checker using discrete IC’s.
10. Verify the Excitation table of, D, JK and T flip-flop using IC7474 & 7476.
11. Construct and verify the truth table of 4-bit ripple counter using IC7476.
12. Test the performance of single digit decade counter with 7segment display using IC7490.
13. Inverting amplifier and Non-Inverting amplifier with AC signal using Op-amp.
14. Summing amplifier & Differential amplifier using Op-amp.
Page 133 of 260
15. Instrumentation Amplifier using Op-amp
16. DAC using IC808.
17. A/D Converter using IC808.
18. DAC using R-2R network.
List of Equipments
S.No
.
Name of the Equipment Range Required
1. Electronic Circuit Designer /Trainer kit - 15
2. DAC using IC808 trainer kit - 1
3. A/D Converter using IC808 trainer kit - 1
4. DAC using R-2R network trainer kit - 1
5. Op-Amp trainer kit - 2
6. Summing amplifier and Differential amplifier using Op-amp trainer kit
- 2
7. Function generators 3 MHz 3
8. Dual trace CRO
30MHz
4
9. Regulated Dual Power Supply 0-30v,1A 5
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Logic/Circuit Diagram 15
2 Pin Diagram 10
3 Connection 20
4 Execution & Handling Of Equipment 15
5 Result 10
6 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 134 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C206.1
Select the IC & verify the truth table of logic gates and realize the basic gates using NAND & NOR gates.
2 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C206.2
Realize logic circuit for a given Boolean expression.
2 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
C206.3
Construct & verify the truth table of half adder, full adder, half Subtractor, full Subtractor, encoder and decoder.
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C206.4
Construct & test the performance of multiplexer, de-multiplexer, parity generator & checker.
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
C206.5
Examine the truth table of JK, T, D flip flop using IC 7474 & IC 7476.
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
C206.6
Construct and test the performance of 4-bit ripple counter using IC 7476 & single digit decade counter using IC 7490.
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C206.7
Test the performance of inverting, non-inverting amplifier circuits with AC signal using OP-amp.
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 1 1 3 1
C206.8
Test the performance of Analog to Digital converter using ADC 0808 and Digital to Analog converter using IC DAC08
1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 10 24 24 16 16 - - 24 16 16 17 17 17 17
Ave 1 3 3 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2.33 2.33 2.33 2.33
Page 135 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : III
Subject Code & Name: ECM37 PROGRAMMING IN ‘C’ PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM37 Programming In ‘C’ Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
4 60
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Keywords, Constants, Variables and Data types Operations and Expressions
4
II Decision Making, Branching and Looping 2
III Arrays, character string and functions 3
IV Pointers and file management 3
V C-Programming practice 44
Revision and Test 04
Total 60
Page 136 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
KEYWORDS, CONSTANTS, VARIABLES AND DATA TYPES Character Set – Constants – Integer Constants – Character Constants – String Constants; Variables – Declaration of Variables; Assigning value to Variables. Operations and Expressions: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical, Assignment, Increment, Decrement, Conditional, Bitwise Operator, Arithmetic Expressions, Evaluation of Expression, I/O Statements
4
II
DECISION MAKING, BRANCHING AND LOOPING Simple if statement, if...else statement; Nesting of if...else statement; else...if ladder; switch case statement; go to statement, While statement; do...while Statement; for statement, break & continue statement.
2
III
ARRAYS,CHARACTER STRING AND FUNCTIONS One Dimensional Arrays; Two Dimensional Arrays – Initializing One dimensional &Two-Dimensional Arrays; Multidimensional Arrays. Character String and Functions Introduction – declaring & initializing string variables; Reading Strings; Writing Strings; Comparison of two Strings; String handling functions; Function – declaration, function – definition, function call, passing arguments, returning values, return statement. Structure definition; Structure Initialization; Arrays of Structures; Structure within structure; Unions.
3
IV
POINTERS AND FILE MANAGEMENT Macro Substitution; File Inclusion; Compiler Controlled Directives. Understanding Pointers: Accessing the address of Variables; Declaring and Initializing Pointers; Accessing a variable through its pointer; Pointer Expressions; Pointer Increments; Pointers and Arrays; Pointer and character Strings; Pointer and functions; Pointers and Structures. Introduction; Defining and Opening a file; closing a file; Error handling during I/O operation; Random Access files; Command line arguments; Appending items to a file.
3
V
C -PROGRAMMING PRACTICE •Simple and compound interest •Quadratic equation •Pay bill calculation statistics •Sum of series using while loop •Multiplication table using Do-While loop •Finding a positive, negative number for a given data. •Sorting a list of numbers. •Sorting the strings.
4
Page 137 of 260
LIST OF EXERCISES:
1. Write a C Program to calculate Simple and Compound interest. 2. Write a C program to calculate the equivalent resistance of resistors and equivalent
capacitance of 3 capacitor connected in series and parallel. 3. Write a C Program to swap two variables using (i) third variable and (ii) without
Using a third variable. 4. Write a C Program to find the largest number between given three numbers using IF- Else
loop. 5. Write a C Program to find sum of series using while loop. 6. Write a C Program to print Multiplication table using do-while loop. 7. Write a C Program to perform arithmetic operations using Switch-case statement. 8. Write a C Program to check whether the given string is palindrome or not. 9. Write a C Program to find reverse of a string. 10. Write a C Program to arrange given names in ascending order. 11. Write a C Program to prepare total marks for N students by reading the name, regno,
mark 1 to mark 6 using array of Structures. 12. Write a C Program to find the sum and average of given three number using function. 13. Write a C Program to find factorial of a given n number using Recursion function. 14. Write a C Program to find length of the string using pointers. 15. Write a C Program to find the number of characters, words & line in a text
HARDWARE REQUIRMENT:
Desktop/laptop computers: 15 nos
Laser printer: 01 no
Software requirement:
Turbo C++
LIST OF QUESTIONS
1. What is the character sets used in ‘C’? 2. What is the purpose of stdio.h in ‘C’? 3. What is the purpose of string.h in ‘C’? 4. How to initialize the variables? 5. What is the use of declaration? 6. What are the types of data-type modifiers in ‘C’? 7. What is the difference between character constant and string constant? 8. What is the range of short int data-type modifier? 9. What is meant by identifier? Give example. 10. Write the syntax for conditional operators? 11. What are the different sets of constants used in ‘C’? 12. What is the numeric variables used in ‘C’? 13. What is meant by header files? 14. What are the types of predefined functions? 15. What is the purpose of put char () function? 16. Write the purpose of printf and scanf () function. 17. What is the purpose of getchar () function? 18. What are the two functions available in c for reading and writing a character? 19. What are the arithmetic operators in c?
Page 138 of 260
20. What is the purpose of isupper and islower function? 21. Write the syntax of if statement. 22. Write the syntax of if else statement. 23. Write the difference between if and else if. 24. What are the rules to follow simple if statement while writing the program? 25. Write the difference between while and do while. 26.What was the purpose of decision making functions? 27.What is the purpose of go to statement? 28.What is the purpose of switch statement? 29.What are the rules for switch statement? 30.What is the difference between while and Do-while? 31.What is the syntax for ‘FOR’ statement? 32.What are the rules for nested if statement? 33.What is nested loop? 34.What are subscript variables or index variables? 35.How to declare a one dimensional array? 36.Char name [200] - How many memory locations are there? 37.Define array. 38.What is one dimensional array? 39.What is array initialization? 40.What is multi-Dimensional array? 41.What are two Dimensional arrays? 42.What is meant by string? 43.How to compare two strings? 44.Mention the string handling functions used in C program. 45.Which operator is used as the string terminator? 46.What is the purpose of return statement? 47.What is nested structure? 48.What are unions? 49.Give the ways to pass the values by arguments. 50.Mention the types of preprocessor directives. 51.The directive is used to include the content of a file into the source code of the program. 52.The directive is used to direct the compiler to skip a part of source code. 53.The variables that contains the address of other variables. 54.What is the operator is used for accessing the address of any variable? 55.What is the difference between conditional and unconditional statements? 56.What is meant by preprocessor? 57.What is meant by array of pointers 58.What is the string reading functions? 59.What is string writing functions? 60.The function is used to find out the number of characters in the given string. 61.The function is used to join the two strings. 62.The function is used to compare the two strings. 63.What is the Statement is used to return the value to the calling function? 64.What function is used to reverse a two strings? 65.What function is used to convert a string in uppercase to lowercase? 66.What is the basic form of functions? 67.What is meant by formal arguments? 68.How functions are defined before it is used? 69.What are the types of function? 70.What are actual arguments?
Page 139 of 260
71.What is array of structures? 72.What is meant by structures? 73.What is the keyword for defining a structure? 74.Difference between arrays and structures. 75.List the applications of structures. 76.State the need of user defined function. 77.Difference between unions and structures. 78.What are the rules for writing preprocessor directives? 79.What is call by reference? 80.What is macro definition with arguments? 81.What is the difference between simple macro and macro definition? 82.The directive is used to include the content of a file into the source code of the program. 83.The directive is used to direct the compiler to skip a part of source code. 84.What is memory unit? 85.List any two advantages of pointers. 86.Which operator is used to access the address of any variable 87.How to initialize the pointers? 88.Difference between array name and pointer. 89.What is file inclusion directive? 90.What are the input/output operations on files? 91.What is the syntax for closing a file? 92.What is the syntax for opening a file? 93.What are the functions used for finding an error while doing I/O operations 94.How to access the variable through pointer? 95.What function is Used for read and write a data into a file. 96.Which Function is used to return the current position of the pointer in the given file? 97.Which Function is used to reset the position of the pointer to be beginning of the given file? 98.What are the arguments that allow parameters to be passed to main from operating system? 99.Which Function is used to move the file pointer to any desired location within the file? 100. What is the Purpose of Append Function
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Algorithm 10
2 Program 20
3 Flow chart 10
3 Compilation & Execution 10
4 Result 10
5 Written test (5*2) 10
6 Viva-voce 05
Total 75
Page 140 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C207.1
Describe the concepts of keywords, constants, variables, data types, operators, looping, branching statements, arrays, string handling functions, pointers and file management.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C207.2
Develop a program to calculate Simple and Compound interest
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
C207.3
Develop a program to find the largest number between given three numbers using IF- else condition. - Else condition.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C207.4
Develop a program to find sum of series using while loop and to print Multiplication table using do-while loop.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C207.5
Develop a program to perform arithmetic operations using Switch-case statement.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C207.6
Develop a programs to prepare total marks for N students using array of Structures
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C207.7
Develop program to find the sum and average of given three number using function and to find length of the string using pointers.
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 2 2 3
C207.8
Develop program to find factorial of a given N number using Recursion function
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 1 1 2 2
Total 24 24 24 16 - - - 24 16 16 16 16 16 16
Ave 3 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2.33 2.17 2.33 2.50
Page 141 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM41 MICROCONTROLLER
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM41
Microcontroller
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Architecture Of 8051 14
II Instruction Set and Programming 14
III I/O and Timers 14
IV Interrupt and Serial Communication 14
V Interfacing Techniques 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 142 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
ARCHITECTURE OF 8051 Comparison of Microprocessor and Microcontroller – Types of Microcontroller-Block diagram of Microcontroller –Functions of each block. Pin details of 8051 – ALU –ROM – RAM – Memory Organization of 8051 - Special function registers.– Program Counter – PSW register –Stack - I/O Ports – Timer – Interrupt – Serial Port – Oscillator and Clock- Clock Cycle – State - Machine Cycle – Instruction cycle – Reset – Power on Reset – Overview of 8051 family.
14
II
INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING Assembling and running an 8051 program –Structure of Assembly Language –Assembler directives - Instruction set of 8051 – Classification of 8051 Instructions - Data transfer instructions – Arithmetic Instructions – Logical instructions –Branching instructions – Bit Manipulation Instructions. Different addressing modes of 8051 – sample Programs - Time delay routines.
14
III
I/O AND TIMERS I/O: Bit addresses for I/O and RAM – I/O programming– I/O bit manipulation programming. TIMER: Programming 8051 Timers – Timer 0 and Timer 1 registers – Different modes of Timer – Mode 0 Programming–Mode 1 Programming - Mode 2 Programming-Counter programming– Different modes of Counter– Mode 0 Programming – Mode 1 Programming -Mode2 Programming(simple programs)
14
IV
INTERRUPT AND SERIAL COMMUNICATION Serial communication: Basics of Serial programming –serial transfer and parallel transfer-definition- RS 232 Standards – 8051 connection to RS 232 – 8051 Serial Communication Programming – Programming 8051 to transmit data serially - Programming 8051 to Receive data serially Interrupts:8051 Interrupt s – Programming Timer Interrupts –Programming external hardware interrupts – Programming the serial communication interrupt – Interrupt priority in 8051 (simple programs).
14
V
INTERFACING TECHNIQUES IC 8255 – Block Diagram – Modes of 8255 - Interfacing external memory to 8051– 8051 interfacing with the 8255 – Relays – Sensor interfacing – ADC interfacing – DAC interfacing - Keyboard interfacing – Seven segment LED Display Interfacing - Stepper Motor interfacing – DC motor interfacing
14
Text Books
1. 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C by Mazidi,Mazidi and D.MacKinlay, 2006 Pearson Education Low PriceEdition
Reference Books:
1. Microcontrollers, Principles and Applications–Ajit pal –PHI Ltd., 2011. 2. Kenneth J Ayala, 8051 Micro controller. 3. B.P.Singh and Renu singh , Interfacing , Prentice Hall , Second edition.
Page 143 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C208.1 Describe about microcontroller.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3
C208.2 Classify the different types of instructions and addressing modes in 8051
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C208.3 Execute simple programs using 8051 instruction set and time delay routines
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C208.4 Carry out various applications of Timer/ counter in 8051 and I/O bit manipulation.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C208.5 Bring out the serial data communications and Interrupt in 8051
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C208.6 Invoke knowledge about types of interfacing techniques in 8051
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
18 18 12 4 - - - - 12 12 16 16 15 16
Ave
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2.67 2.67 2.50 2.67
Page 144 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM41 MICROCONTROLLER
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each) 4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Define microcontroller. 2. What is the capacity of RAM in 8051. 3. List any two assembler directives. 4. Which instruction is used to generate time delay? 5. List the modes of operation of timers. 6. What are the special function register used in timers? 7. Define framing. 8. State the purpose of RS232 serial interface. 9. What is the other name of 8255? 10. Define signal conditioning.
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT – I 11. Write short notes on RAM memory organization in 8051. 12. Write short notes on I/O ports of 8051.
UNIT - II
13. What are bit oriented instructions? 14. Write an assembly language program for multi byte addition.
UNIT - III
15. Draw the configuration of TMOD Register. 16. Write notes on programming of 8051 timer.
UNIT –IV
17. Draw and explain the pin description for DB9. 18. Write short notes on RS 232 serial interface.
UNIT - V
19. Draw the control word format of 8255. 20. Write notes on interfacing of external memory to 8051.
Page 145 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I 21. Draw and explain the block diagram of 8051 microcontroller. (10) 22. (A) Explain in detail about instruction cycle (5) (B)Write short notes on I/O ports of 8051 (5)
UNIT - II 21. Classify the instruction set of 8051 and explain in detail. (10) 22. Explain in detail, the addressing modes of 8051. (10)
UNIT - III 25. (A) Explain the steps for mode1 programming of timers of 8051. (5) (B)Write an assembly language program to use timer as a counter. (5) 26. Explain the function of TCON and TMOD register in detail. (10) UNIT-IV 27. What are the registers used in Serial Communication? (10) 28. Explain IP and IE registers. (10) UNIT - V 29. Draw the block diagram of 8255 and explain. (10) 30. Explain in detail about stepper motor interface. (10)
Page 146 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM42 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM42
Communication
Engineering
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Networks, Antenna And Propagation 14
II Amplitude Modulation 14
III Angle and Pulse Modulation 14
IV Audio Systems 14
V Video Systems 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 147 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
NETWORKS, ANTENNA AND PROPAGATION Symmetrical and asymmetrical networks - characteristic impedance and propagation constant. Equalizer: types, applications: constant resistance equalizer. Attenuator: types - symmetrical T and Pi attenuators –application and simple problems Filters: types and definitions – circuit elements and cutoff frequencies of LPF, HPF and BPF (only simple problems). Antennas: Basic antenna principle (feeder mechanism), polarization, directive gain, directivity, radiation pattern, folded dipole, parasitic array, broad-side and end-fire array, Yagi antenna, parabolic antenna, Horn antenna. Propagation (short theory only) :Ground wave propagation, sky wave, space wave propagation, ionospheric layers.
14
II
AMPLITUDE MODULATION Modulation: Classification of RF wave. Noise-Internal Noise, External Noise. Frequency spectrum. Relation between wavelength and frequency, Need for modulation, types of modulation. Amplitude modulation: Expression, AM spectrum and side bands, types of AM balanced modulator. SSB generation-Phase shift and filter methods, advantages and disadvantages of SSB.AM VSB system. Diode detector. AM Transmitter: - Types of transmitter-high level AM Transmitter and low level AM transmitter. SSB Transmitter. AM Receiver: TRF Receiver, super heterodyne radio receive-selection of IF-image frequency-AGC types, SSB receiver.
14
III
ANGLE AND PULSE MODULATION Frequency modulation: Expression waveforms - frequency spectrum, effects of noise in FM, comparison of AM and FM, varactor diode modulator. FM detectors – slope detector, phase discriminator, ratio detector (qualitative treatment only) FM Transmitters & Receiver: Direct and Indirect methods- stereophonic FM transmitter. FM receiver: Block diagram – AFC-stereophonic FM receiver. Phase modulation: Principles, phase modulator circuit, comparison between FM and PM. Pulse modulation: types, sampling theorem. Generation and detection of PAM, PWM, PPM. PCM, DPCM, Delta modulation– quantizing noise-companding.
14
IV
AUDIO SYSTEMS Microphones: (Qualitative treatment only) Construction and performance of the following Microphones: carbon, condenser, piezo-electric, moving coil and velocity ribbon. Loud speakers: Constructional details of dynamic cone type, Horn type and electro-static loud speakers, woofer, midrange and tweeter, cross-over network. Surround-sound systems: Compact disc system- MP3 system - DVD system - stereophonic system - Hi-Fi system principles- Dolby –DTS-Blue Ray Disc-Various audio format.
14
Page 148 of 260
V
VIDEO SYSTEMS Monochrome Television: Scanning principles - synchronization - aspect ratio- composite video Signal- TV broadcasting standards. TV transmitter- TV receiver. Colour TV: Principles of colour transmission and reception- color CCD camera. PAL colour TV receiver (IC details not required)-Digital colour TV receiver, LCD, LED display unit – plasma display - Principles of Handy cam, CCTV and cable TV, HDTV (Basic Idea Only)-TV Standards(NTSC,SECAM,PAL)-Set top box
14
Text Books:
1. John D.Ryder, Networks lines and fields , PHI- Second edition 2. Kennedy, Electronic communication Systems, TMH- Fourth edition 3. Dennis Roddy and John Colen, Electronic Communication, PHI- Fourth edition Reference Books:
1. Kingsler & Frey, Fundamentals of Acoustics, Wiley Eastern ltd- Second edition 2. Arvind M.Dhake, TV and Video engineering, TMH- Second edition
3. Louis E Frenzel , Communication Electronics – Principles and application , 3rd Edition, Tata McGrawhill publication 4. R.Gupta , Audio and Video system – Principles, maintenance and Troubleshooting, Second Edition McGrawHill Education (P) Ltd. 5. Simon Haykins , Analog Communication- Wiley Student Edition.
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C209.1 Describe the fundamental concepts of network, antenna and various types of propagation
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 1 2
C209.2
Apply the knowledge about basic modulation and amplitude modulation to develop logical thinking for communication over long distances
3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3
C209.3 Describe the basic knowledge about frequency and pulse modulation in transmitting and receiving side.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2 2 2
C209.4 Invoke the knowledge about the various levels of audio systems
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2 2 2
C209.5
Bring out the basic concepts of recording and reproduction techniques of various recording devices such as CD,DVD and stereophonic system
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2 2 1
C209.6
Invoke knowledge about basic principles of video system such as monochrome TV ,color TV transmitter and receiver
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
18 18 12 1 - - - - 12 12 16 13 11 12
Ave 3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 2 2.67 2.17 1.83 2
Page 149 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time:Three Hours Maximum Marks : 75 Subject Code & Name : ECM42 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any TWO Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. What is Equalizer? 2. Define symmetrical network. 3. Define modulation 4. State the advantage of VSB 5. What is AFC? 6. Expand PPM 7. Define loud speaker 8. Expand DTS 9. Define aspect ratio 10. What is interlaced scanning?
Part B (3x5=15) UNIT-I
11. Write short notes on filters 12. Compare symmetrical and asymmetrical network.
UNIT - II
13. List out the advantages of SSB 14. Draw the block diagram of diode detector
UNIT - III
15. Write short notes on companding. 16. Mention any four differences between PM and FM.
UNIT - IV
17. Compare cone type & horn type loudspeaker. 18. Draw only the diagram of DVD player
UNIT - V
19. Describe the operation of plasma display 20. List out the features of LED display
Page 150 of 260
Part C (10x5=50) UNIT - I
21. Explain about a) Broad side array with neat diagram. (5) b) End fire array with neat diagram. (5)
22. Derive high pass filter & find its circuit elements. (10)
UNIT - II
23. Explain about balanced modulator with neat diagram. (10) 24. Explain about the operation of Superheterodyne Receiver. (10)
UNIT – III
25. Explain the operation of Ratio detector with neat diagram. (10) 26. i) Explain the FM receiver with circuit diagram. (5) ii) Explain the AFC with neat block diagram. (5)
UNIT – IV 27. Explain the working of condenser microphone with neat diagram. (10) 28. Explain the working principle of electrostatic loudspeaker with diagram. (10) UNIT - V 29. Explain the cable television with block diagram. (10)
30. With a neat diagram explain the working of PAL colour TV receiver. (10)
Page 151 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM43 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM43 Industrial Electronics
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks
Duration in
Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No
Topics Hours
I Power Devices and Trigger Circuits 14
II Converters and Choppers (Qualitative Treatment Only) 14
III Inverters & Applications 14
IV Programmable Logic Controller 14
V Distributed Control Systems And Robotics
14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 152 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
POWER DEVICES AND TRIGGER CIRCUITS Thyristor family –Working principle, VI characteristics and applications of SCR – Definitions for holding current, latching current, dv/dt rating, di/dt rating. Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT), MOSFET and GTO - Symbol, principle of working, VI characteristics and applications. Triggering of SCR - Gate triggering –Types –Concepts of DC triggering, AC triggering, Pulse gate triggering – Pulse transformer in trigger circuit – Electrical isolation by opto isolator - Resistance capacitor firing circuit and waveform, Synchronized UJT triggering (ramp triggering) circuit and waveform.
14
II
CONVERTERS AND CHOPPERS (Qualitative treatment only) Converters – Definition – Single phase Half controlled bridge converter with R load and RL load - importance of flywheel diode –Single phase fully controlled bridge converter with resistive load – voltage and current waveforms – Single phase fully controlled bridge converter with RL load – voltage and current waveforms. Commutation- Natural commutation – Forced commutation – Types of forced commutation (mention the types only). Chopper – Definition –principle of DC chopper operation – Typical chopper circuit (Jones chopper) –Applications of DC chopper – Principle of working of single phase AC chopper - Chopper using MOSFET.
14
III
INVERTERS & APPLICATIONS Inverter - Definition -Requirement of an inverter –Single phase inverter with resistive load – Single phase inverter with RL load –Methods to obtain sine wave output from an inverter- Output voltage control in inverters - McMurray inverter – advantages - Parallel inverter using IGBT. HVDC Transmission- principle – advantages – drawbacks SMPS - Block diagram of SMPS – advantages and disadvantages. UPS-Type (ON Line, OFF Line), Comparison.
14
IV
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Introduction to PLC – Relays- Block diagram of PLC – Basics of Input and output module (digital input and output module) - Logic functions - AND logic, OR logic, NAND logic, EX-OR logic -symbols used in ladder logic diagram. Ladder programming – Ladder diagram for simple systems –Star delta starter, Conveyer control and Lift control.
14
V
DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS AND ROBOTICS
Evolution- Hybrid system Architecture– Central system Architecture– Generalized Distributed Control - Architecture– comparison of architectures– Local control unit–Basic Elements of LCU– Displays – Plant – Area–Group- Loop – Features of DCS – Advantages of DCS.Introduction to Robots – Advantages of Robots.
14
Page 153 of 260
Text Books:
1. Harish C.Rai , Industrial & Power Electronics, Umesh Publication, 5th Edition - 1994 2. Dr.P.S.Bimbhra, Power Electronics, Khanna publishers -2nd Edition-1998
Reference Books:
1. M.H.Rashid, Power Electronics, PHI Publication-3rd Edition-2005
2. Pradeep Kumar& Srivashtava, Programmable Logic Controller, BPB Publications
3. Yoram Korean &Joseph Ben, Numerical control of Machines
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C210.1 Obtain knowledge about power devices and triggering circuits
3 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3
C210.2 Acquired knowledge about converters, commutation and chopper circuits.
3 3 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C210.3 Describe the broad ideas about inverters, SMPS, UPS and HVDC transmission
3 3 - - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C210.4 Invoke knowledge about PLC 3 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 2 3
C210.5 Able to develop ladder diagram for Application
3 3 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 3 3 3
C210.6 Describe the architectures of various Distributed Control Systems and basics of Robotics.
3 3 - - - - - - 2 2 2 3 3 3
Total 18 18 12 4 - - - - 12 12 15 17 15 17
Ave 3 3 3 2 - - - - 2 2 2.50 2.83 2.50 2.83
Page 154 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM43 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each) 4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Draw the symbol of IGBT.
2. List the different methods of gate triggering.
3. Define converter.
4. Define commutation.
5. What is inverter?
6. Expand SMPS
7. Define PLC.
8. What is relay?
9. Expand DCS.
10. What is robot?
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Define latching current and holding current.
12. Mention the applications of MOSFET.
UNIT - II
13. Write the importance of flywheel diode. 14. Draw the circuit diagram of single phase AC chopper.
UNIT - III
15. List the methods to obtain sine wave from an inverter. Explain any one. 16. Compare ON-line and OFF-line UPS.
UNIT - IV
17. Draw the ladder diagram for NAND, AND, EX-OR logic. 18. Compare PLC circuit with Hardwired circuit.
Page 155 of 260
UNIT - V
19. Differentiate central system and distributed system. 20. List out the advantages of ROBOTS.
Part C (10x5=50) UNIT - I
21. a) Explain the switching characteristics of SCR. (5) b) Explain about electrical isolation by opto isolator (5)
22. Explain the operation of synchronized UJT triggering with circuit diagram and waveform. (10)
UNIT - II
23. Explain the operation of single phase fully controlled bridge converter with RL load with circuit diagram. (10)
24. Explain the operation of Jones chopper (10)
UNIT - III
25. a) Explain HVDC Transmission (6) b) Draw the block diagram of SMPS. (4)
26. Explain the operation of McMurray inverter with circuit diagram. (10) UNIT - IV
27. Draw the ladder diagram of Star delta starter and explain its operation. (10) 28. Draw the block diagram of PLC and explain each part in detail. (10)
UNIT - V
29. Draw the architecture of distributed control system and explain its operation. (10) 30. Explain local control unit with neat diagram. (10)
Page 156 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM44 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject
Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM44 Very Large
Scale Integrated
Circuits
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Combinational Circuit Design 14
II VHDL for Combinational Circuit 14
III Elements of VHDL and Different Styles of Modeling in VHDL 14
IV VHDL for Sequential Circuit 14
V PLDs and FPGA 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 157 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN AND INTRODUCTION TO VLSI: NMOS and CMOS logic implementation of switch, NOT, AND, OR, NAND and NOR gates, CMOS transmission gates. Boolean algebra and circuit synthesis using gates (upto 4 variables) simplification using SOP (Or) POS. An overview of VLSI- Complexity and design, General overview of design hierarchy, Design flow, VLSI chip types, basic concepts.
14
II
VHDL FOR COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT: Introduction to CAD tool and VHDL: Design entry, Synthesis and simulation, Concurrent signal assignment statements, process statements, different level of abstraction. VHDL CODE: AND, OR, NAND, NOR gates, Implementation of MUX, DEMUX, Encoder, Decoder, Four bit Arithmetic Addition, Subtraction ,Multiplication and comparator in VHDL.
14
III
ELEMENTS OF VHDL AND DIFFERENT STYLES OF MODELING IN VHDL: Elements of VHDL -Entity, Architecture, Event scheduling, sequential statements, Architectural selection, configuration statements, data types, VHDL sub programs and packages. Different styles of modeling in VHDL-behavioral modeling, dataflow modeling and structural modeling.
14
IV
VHDL FOR SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT: VHDL constructs for storage elements. VHDL code for DFF, JK FF, TFF with or without reset input. DESIGN STEPS: State diagram, state table, state assignments. Moore and Mealy Type Serial adder. VHDL code for 3 bit Up/down counter, Decade counter, Johnson counters.
14
V
PLDs AND FPGA: Introduction to PLD,PLA and PAL. Implementation of combinational circuits with PAL and PLA (upto 4 variables).Comparison between PLA and PAL. Introduction to Complex Programmable Logic device, Field Programmable gate Array and macrocell. Introduction to ASIC. Types of ASIC.
14
Page 158 of 260
TEXTBOOK: 1. “Digital Design” M.Morris Mano Michael D Ciletti Pearson Education 2008 2. “Introduction to VLSI CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS” John P.Uyemura Wiley student Edition 3. “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL design” Stephen brown and
Vranesic 2nd edition McGrawHill,2008
4. “VHDL Primer” Bhasker J Prentice Hall India-2009
REFERENCES: 1. “Digital Electronics with PLD Integration” Nigel P. Cook, Prentice Hall, 2000
2. “Programmable Logic Handbook: PLD, CPLD, and FPGA” Ashok K.Sharma, McGraw-Hill,
1998
3. “Digital Logic Simulation and CPLD Programming with VHDL” Steve
Waterman Prentice Hall.
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO'S PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C211.1 Obtain knowledge about Combinational circuit design and overview of VLSI
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 1 1
C211.2 Invoke knowledge in VLSI design process and VHDL statements
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2 3 2 3
C211.3 Implement VHDL code for different combinational circuits
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C211.4
Acquire knowledge to describe various elements of VHDL and different styles of modelling in VHDL.
3 3 1 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C211.5
Implement VHDL for sequential circuits and able to understand the concepts of Moore & Mealy type serial adder
3 3 1 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C211.6 Develop combinational circuits using PAL & PLA and able to describe CPLD, FPGA & ASIC
3 3 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 18 9 12 - - - - 12 12 13 14 12 13
Ave
3 3 1.50 2 - - - -
2 2 2.17 2.33 2 2.17
Page 159 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM44 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each) 4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Expand CMOS. 2. Draw the symbol of NMOS. 3. Expand VHDL. 4. Define the term synthesis. 5. What is Entity? 6. List out the various data types in VHDL. 7. What do you meant by storage elements? 8. Define flip flop. 9. What is PLA? 10. Expand ASIC.
Part B (3x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Draw the logic diagram of CMOS NOR. 12. Write short note on VLSI design flow.
UNIT - II
13. Write about design entry. 14. Write a VHDL code for 4 bit arithmetic adder.
UNIT - III
15. Brief note on event scheduling. 16. Write about architecture selection.
UNIT - IV
17. Write a VHDL code for T flip flop. 18. Compare Moore and Mealy models.
UNIT -V
19. Write about macro cell. 20. Differentiate PLA and PAL.
Page 160 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I
21. Explain CMOS NAND gate with logic diagram. (10) 22. Explain design hierarchy of VLSI in detail. (10)
UNIT - II
23. (A)Explain concurrent signal assignment statements and Process statements. (10) 24. (A)Write a VHDL code for implementing the Multiplexer. (6)
(B)Write a simple VHDL code for AND gate. (4)
UNIT - III
25. Explain VHDL sub programs and packages in detail. (10) 26. Explain in detail about behavioral modeling. (10).
UNIT – IV
27. Write a VHDL code for JK Flip flop with reset input. (10) 28. Write a VHDL codes for 3-bit Up/Down counter. (10)
UNIT - V
29. Implement the function F=∑ (0, 1, 2, 5, 7) in PLA and PAL. (10) 30. Explain FPGA architecture in detail. (10)
Page 161 of 260
Course Name: DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM45 MICROCONTROLLER PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM45 Microcontroller Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
4 60
Continuous
Assessment
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
LISTOFEXPERIMENTS
Part-A SIMULATION
1. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Multi-byte Addition.
2. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Multiplication and Division of two
numbers.
3. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for arranging the given data in ascending
order.
4. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for BCD to Hex conversion.
5. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Hex to BCD conversion.
6. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Hex to ASCII and vice-versa.
7. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Parity bit generation.
8. Write and execute an Assembly Language Program for using timer / Counter.
Part – B INTERFACING WITH APPLICATION BOARDS
1. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing LED with Switches and test it.
2. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing seven segments LED displays and test
it.
3. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing running LEDs displays and test it.
Page 162 of 260
4. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing Matrix keyboard and test it.
5. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing 8 bit ADC and test it.
6. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing 8 bit DAC and test it.
7. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing STEPPER MOTOR and test it.
8. Write an Assembly Language Program for interfacing DC motor and test it.
9. Write an Assembly Language Program for Sending data through serial port between
controller kits and test it.
List of equipments:
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1. Desktop/laptop computers - 20
2. 89C51 microcontroller kit with LED
interfacing
- 8
3. ADC interfacing kit - 2
4. STEPPER MOTOR interfacing - 2
5. DC motor interfacing - 1
Software requirement:
UMPS 1.75C Demo
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Algorithm 10
2 Program 25
3 Flow chart 10
3 Compilation & Execution 15
4 Result 10
5 Viva-Voce 05
Total 75
Page 163 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C212.1
Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Multi-byteAddition, Multiplication and Division
3 2 3 - - - - 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
C212.2 Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for sorting the numbers
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
C212.3
Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for BCD to Hex , Hex to BCD , Hex to ASCII and vice-versa
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
C212.4 Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for Parity bit generation
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
C212.5 Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for using timer / Counter
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C212.6
Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for interfacing LED with Switches, Matrix keyboard, seven segment LED displays, running LED’s,
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C212.7
Able to write and execute an Assembly Language Program for interfacing 8 bit ADC DAC, Stepper motor, DC motor
3 2 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 21 14 21 13 - - - 21 14 14 19 19 20 16
Ave 3 2 3 2.17 - - - 3 2 2 2.83 2.83 2.83 2.33
Page 164 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM46 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM46 Industrial
Electronics and
Communication
Engineering Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
6 90
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Note:
At least 5 experiments should be constructed from A and B using breadboard / soldering
The student has to do 1 experiment from A and 1 experiment from B for the Autonomous practical Examination
A. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LAB
1. Phase control characteristics of SCR
2. Construct and test commutation circuits of SCR.
3. Construct a Lamp dimmer using TRIAC (in Bread Board Only)
4. Construct and test a MOSFET based PWM chopper circuit
5. Construct and test an IC based buck converter using PWM
6. Write and implement a simple ladder logic program using digital inputs and outputs for
PLC.
7. Write and implement a simple ladder logic program for interfacing a lift control with PLC.
8. Write and implement a simple ladder logic program for interfacing a conveyer control
with PLC
9. Write and implement a simple ladder logic program using timer and counter with
Branching and Subroutines with PLC.
Page 165 of 260
List of Equipments
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1. Phase control characteristics of SCR kit - 1
2. Commutation circuits of SCR kit - 1
3. MOSFET based PWM chopper kit - 1
4. IC based buck converter using PWM kit - 1
5. Desktop computers - 2
6. Lift control interfacing kit with PLC 1
7. Conveyor control interfacing kit with PLC 1
Software required:
RSlogix software
B. COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LAB
1. Construct & test symmetrical T & Pi attenuators
2. Construct and test constant k passive low pass filter & high pass filter
3. Construct an AM modulator and Detector circuit and trace the output waveform
4. Construct a FM modulator circuit and trace the output waveform
5. Construct and test PAM generation circuit and detection circuit.
6. Construct and test PWM generation circuit and detection circuit
7. Construct and test PPM generation circuit and detection circuit
8. Construct and test PCM transmitter and receiver circuit
9. Construct and test a three way crossover network.
Page 166 of 260
List of Equipments
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1. T & Pi attenuator kit - 1
2. Low pass filter & High pass filter kit - 1
3. FM modulator kit - 1
4. PAM generation circuit and detection kit - 1
5. PWM generation circuit and detection kit - 2
6. PPM generation circuit and detection kit 1
7. PCM transmitter and receiver kit 1
8 Dual Trace CRO 20Mhz 5
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks Marks
1 A.
Circuit Diagram / Ladder diagram 10
35 Connection & Handling the Equipment 10
Tabulation / Execution 05
Calculation / Graph/ Result 10
2 B.
Circuit Diagram 10
35 Connection & Handling the Equipment 10
Tabulation 05
Calculation / Graph/ Result 10
3 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 167 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C213.1
Obtain knowledge to construct and test phase control characteristics and commutation of SCR
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
C213.2 Invoke knowledge to construct a lamp dimmer using TRIAC.
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C213.3
Obtain knowledge to construct and test MOSFET based PWM chopper and IC based buck converter circuit. Implement simple ladder logic program for interfacing lift control and conveyor control
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C213.4
Implement simple ladder logic program using digital inputs and outputs. Implement simple ladder logic program using timer and counter
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C213.5 Obtain knowledge to construct and test symmetrical T and Pi attenuator
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C213.6 Invoke knowledge to construct low pass filter and high pass filter
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C213.7
Obtain knowledge to construct AM and FM modulator and to trace output waveform. Invoke knowledge to construct three way cross over network
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C213.8
Obtain knowledge to construct PAM, PWM,PPM and PCM generation and detection circuit
3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 24 24 24 24 - - - 24 16 16 23 23 22 23
Ave 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 2 2.83 2.83 2.83 2.83
Page 168 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM47 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM47 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuit Practical
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in Hours
4 60
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. SIMULATION OF VHDL CODE FOR COMBINATIONALCIRCUIT
Optimize a 4 variable combinational function (SOP or POS), describe it in VHDL code and
simulate it. Example: F= (0, 5, 8, 9, 12) in sop or pos 2. SIMULATION OF VHDL CODE FOR ARITHMETIC CIRCUITS
Design and Develop the circuit for the following arithmetic function in VHDL Codes
and simulate it. Addition, Subtraction Multiplication (4 x 4 bits) 3. SIMULATION OF VHDL CODE FOR MULTIPLEXER
Design and develop a 2bit multiplexer and port map the same for developing upto 8
bit multiplexer.
4. SIMULATION OF VHDL CODE FOR DEMULTIPLEXER
Design and develop an8 output demultiplexer. Simulate the same code in the
software.
5. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF MULTIPLEXER
Describe the code for a multiplexer and implement it in FPGA kit in which switches are
connected for select input and for data inputs a LED is connected to the output.
6. VHDLIMPLEMENTATION OF DEMULTIPLEXER
Switches are connected for select inputs and a data input, Eight LEDs are
connected to the output of the circuit.
Page 169 of 260
7. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF 7SEGMENT DECODER
Develop Boolean expression for 4 input variables and 7 output variables. Design and
develop a seven segment decoder in VHDL for 7 equations. A seven segment display is
connected to the output of the circuit. Four switches are connected to the input. The 4
bit input is decoded to 7 segment equivalent. 8. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF 7SEGMENT DECODER BY LUT
Develop a 7 segment decoder using Lookup table. Describe the seven segment
decoder in VHDL using developed Lookup table. A seven segment display is connected
to the output of the circuit. Four switches are connected to the input. The 4 bit input is
decoded into 7 segment equivalent. 9. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF ENCODER
Design and develop HDL code for decimal (Octal) to BCD encoder. There will be10 input
switches (or8 switches) and 4LEDs in the FPGA kit. The input given from switches and it is
noted that anyone of the switch is active. The binary equivalent for the corresponding
input switch will be glowing in the LED as output.
10. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION FOR BLINKING A LED
Develop a VHDL Code for delay and verify by simulating it. This delay output is
connected to LED. Delay is adjusted such away LED blinks for every 1 or2 seconds. 11. SIMULATE A VHDL TEST BENCH CODE FOR TESTING A GATE
Develop a VHDL test bench code for testing anyone of the simple gate.
Simulate the test bench code in the HDL software. 12. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION FOR BLINKING AN ARRAY OF LEDS
Design and develop a VHDL Code for4 bit binary up counter. Four LEDs are
connected at the output of the counter. The counter should up for everyone seconds. 13. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF A SPELLER WITH AN ARRAY OF LEDS
Design and develop VHDL Code for a 5 bit Johnson ring counter 4 bit The LEDs are connected at the output of the counter. The speller should work for everyone seconds.
14. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF 7 SEGMENT DISPLAY
Design and develop a seven segment decoder in VHDL. Design and develop a 4 bit
BCD counter, the output of the counter is given to seven segment decoder. A seven
segment display is connected to the output of the decoder. The display shows 0, 1, 2, 9
for everyone second
15. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF STEPPER MOTOR INTERFACE
16. VHDL IMPLEMENTATION OF TRAFFIC LIGHT CONTROL
Page 170 of 260
List of Equipments:
S.No. Name of the Equipment Range Required
1. Desktop/laptop computers - 15
2. Field Programmable Gate Array kit - 5
3. Traffic Light control interfacing kit - 2
4. STEPPER MOTOR interfacing kit - 2
5. DC motor interfacing kit - 1
Software required:
Xilinx 9.2i software
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Interface circuit Diagram 15
2 Algorithm 10
3 Program 25
3 Execution 10
4 Result 10
5 Viva-Voce 05
Total 75
Page 171 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C214.1
Develop VHDL code to simulate combinational circuit, arithmetic circuits, multiplexer and De-multiplexer
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C214.2
Develop VHDL code to implement multiplexer, de-multiplexer, Encoder, 7Segment Decoder by LUT concept.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C214.3 Develop VHDL code to simulate test bench code for testing a gate.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C214.4
Develop VHDL code to implement blinking a LED, blinking an array of LEDs and speller with an array of LEDs.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C214.5 Develop VHDL code to implement 7 segment display
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
C214.6 Develop VHDL code to implement stepper motor interface, traffic light control
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 12 18 12 - - - 18 12 12 - - - -
Ave 3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2.67 2.67 2.5 2.67
Page 172 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : IV
Subject Code & Name: ECM48 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING – I
The students are expected to gain a working experience in various departments of an
industry / organisation and hence learning the industrial management in a practical way.The
students have to undergo a six months industrial training (PHASE I) during the IV semester in a
related industry / organisation. During the training period the students are maintaining an
Industrial diary to record their observation and learning. On completion of training, a training
report should be submitted to the Head of the Department. Industrial training of Sandwich
students will be evaluated based on Continuous Assessment of two periodical reviews and an End
semester Examination on Assessment of Training Report and viva-voce.
SANDWICH DIPLOMA COURSE - INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
1. Introduction
The main objective of the Sandwich Diploma Course is to mould a well rounded technician
acclimated with industrial environment while being a student in the institution.
The Sandwich Diploma Course study is pursued by students, in 7 semesters of 3½ years duration,
the subjects of 3 years - Full Time Diploma Course being regrouped for academic convenience.
While in the 4th semester students undergo Industrial Training-I for 6 months (December through
May). They also do course work in the institution for one day in a week, while in the 7th semester
they undergo another spell of 6 months (June through November) Industrial training-II.
The Apprenticeship (Amendment) Act 1973 is followed in regulating the Industrial training
procedure for Sandwich Course.
I SEM II SEM III SEM IV SEM V SEM VI SEM VII SEM
First Spell - IV Semester (December - May)
Second Spell - VII Semester (June - November
Institutional study
Industrial Training
Page 173 of 260
2. Attendance Certification
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by industrial supervisor in the
prescribed form. Students have also to put their signature on the form and submit it to the
institutional staff in-charge. Attendance and submission of Review reports will be duly considered
while awarding the Continuous Assessment mark.
3. Training Reports
The students have to prepare two types of reports:
Weekly report in the form of diary to be submitted to the concerned staff in-charge of the institution. This will be reviewed while awarding Continuous Assessment mark.
Comprehensive report at the end of each phase of Industrial Training will be reviewed while awarding End semester Examination marks.
3.1 Industrial Training Diary
Students are required to maintain the record of day - to- day work done. Such record is called
Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days of the week should
be accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence, Absence, Leave, and Holiday etc).
The concerned Industrial supervisor is to check periodically these progress reports.
3.2 Comprehensive Training Report
In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report on training with
details of the organization where the training was undergone after attestation by the supervisors.
The comprehensive report should be incorporating study of plant/ product /process/ construction
along with intensive in-depth study on any one of the topics such as processes, methods, tooling,
construction and equipment, highlighting aspects of quality, productivity and system. The
comprehensive report should be completed in the last week of Industrial training. Any data,
drawings etc should be incorporated with the consent of the Organization.
4. Scheme of Evaluation
Components SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
Continuous
Assessment Mark
1 First review 20
2 Second review 20
3 Attendance 10
End Examination 4 Comprehensive Training Report 20
5 Viva-Voce 30
Total 100
Page 174 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: EEM51 Industrial Management
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
EEM51 Industrial Management
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Principles of Management, Personnel Management and
Organizational Behaviour
14
II Financial Management and Material Management 14
III Total Quality Management 14
IV Quality Control Tools & Management Planning Tools 14
V 5S concepts, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) and
Quality Management System
14
Revision and test 05
Total 75
Page 175 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT, PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT AND
ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
Principles of Management
Definition of management – Administration – Organization –
F.W.Taylor’s and Henry Fayol’s Principles of Management – Functions of
Manager –Directing – Leadership – Styles of Leadership – Qualities of a
good leader – Communication - Formal and Informal communication –
Motivation: Positive and negative motivation.
Personnel Management
Functions of personnel management- Selection Process- Training of
workers – Apprentice training, On the job training and vestibule school
training – Job evaluation and merit rating – Definition, objectives-
Definition of Wage and salary-
Wage Payment plans – Time rate systems - Halsey’s 50% plan, Rowan’s
plan and Emerson’s efficiency plan – Problems.
ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
Types of organization – Line, Staff, Taylor’s Pure functional types, Line
and staff, committee type organization.
14
II FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT AND MATERIAL MANAGEMENT Financial
Management
Definition of Fixed and Working Capital- Sources of finance – Shares-
types - preference and equity shares – Debentures – Comparison of Shares
and debentures - Factory costing - Elements of cost – types - Direct cost –
Indirect cost – Factory overheads – fixation of selling price of a product –
profit – problems- Depreciation – Causes – Methods – Straight line, Sinking
fund and percentage on diminishing value method – problems.
Material Management
Objectives of Material Management – ABC analysis of inventory –
Procurement and consumption cycle – safety stock - re-order level -
lead time - Economic order quantity - problems – Principles and brief
description of Modern Management Techniques - BPR, SCM, ERP, ABM -
Purchasing procedure – Functions of Store keeping – Bin card.
14
Page 176 of 260
III TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Definition of Quality - Perceptions of quality – Juran, Crosby – Dimensions
of quality - performance, features, reliability, conformance, durability,
aesthetics and perceived quality – Definition of TQM - concepts of TQM -
principles of TQM.
Quality planning- Key elements- quality statements - vision, mission,
objectives – strategic planning – process and cycle of strategic planning -
cost of quality – classification – PAF, Life cycle model- customer
satisfaction – customer complaints-customer retention -continuous
process improvement – steps - PDCA cycle.
14
IV QUALITY CONTROL TOOLS & MANAGEMENT PLANNING TOOLS
Quality Circle – Definition, key elements, benefits of quality circle –
concepts of brainstorming
Quality Control Tools – Check sheet, Histogram, Pareto diagram, Flow
chart, Cause and effect (ISHIKAWA diagram), Scatter diagram – Control
charts
Management Planning Tools - Affinity diagram, Interrelationship diagram,
tree diagram, matrix diagram, prioritization matrix, process decision
program chart, Activity network diagram (PERT/ CPM) - Definition of JIT –
Advantages of JIT - Principles and brief description of Modern
Management Techniques - BPR, SCM, ERP, ABM
14
V 5S CONCEPTS, TPM AND QMS
5S CONCEPTS
SEIRI, SEITON, SEISO, SHIKETSU and SHITSUKE – objectives –
benefits of 5S
TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE (TPM)
Definition of TPM – objectives of TPM – elements of TPM – pillars
of TPM - Stages of TPM development
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)
Definition – principles of QMS – Requirement of QMS- Advantages
of QMS – need for Quality system – Definition of standard – QMS aspects:
Customer needs and expectations, supplier needs and interests –ISO
definition –aims of ISO- benefits of ISO to the organization – definition of
Quality audit – types of audit-internal, external, second party and third
party audit.
14
Page 177 of 260
Text Books:
1. O.P.Khanna , ”Industrial Engineering and Management”, by Dhanpat Rai publications. 2. R.Ramakrishnan, “Total Quality Management’, by Eswar press
Reference Books:
1. Dr. Chitale.A.K and DrK.C.Jain., "Quality Assurance and Total Quality", Khanna Publishers,New Delhi, 1998
2. Dr. Singh.B., "Quality control and Reliability", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1998 3. Jerry Banks, "Principles of Quality Control", John Wiley, 1989 4. Sundaraju.S.M., "Total Quality Management", Tata McGraw Hill, 1998 5. Armand.V.Feigenbaum, "Total Quality Control", 3rd Edn., McGraw Hill International 6. Howard Cuitlow, "Quality Management", Tata McGraw Hill, 1998
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C301.1 Implement the principles of management & personnel management using socio ethics
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 2 - 3
C301.2 Carry out the knowledge of financial management & inventory control system
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 3 - 3
C301.3 Implement the concepts of total quality management.
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 3 - 3
C301.4 Use the quality control tools and management planning tools.
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 2 - 2
C301.5 Implement the 5S concepts and total quality management & total productive maintenance.
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 3 - 3
C301.6 Explain the benefits & the requirements of QMS(ISO)
3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 3 - 2
Total 18 18 12 18 18 12 12 12 12 18 - -
Ave 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 - 2.67 - 2.67
Page 178 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time-Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code and Name: EEM51 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Note: 1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each) 4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Define Management. 2. List the types of organization. 3. List the resources of capital. 4. What is BIN card. 5. Define Quality. 6. Expand PDCA. 7. Define Quality circle. 8. Define JIT. 9. List the 5S concepts. 10. Define Quality Audit.
Part B (3x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. State the qualities of a good leader. 12. Write short notes on Hasley’s 50% plan.
UNIT - II
13. Write short note on Debentures. 14. State the objectives of good stock control system.
UNIT - III
15. State the principles of TQM. 16. Write short notes on customer satisfaction.
UNIT - IV
17. Write a brief note on modern management techniques. 18. Write short notes on pareto diagram.
UNIT -V
19. Mention the objectives of TPM. 20. State the benefits of ISO to the organization.
Page 179 of 260
Part C (10x5=50) UNIT - I
21. Explain in detail about the functions of manager. (10) 22. (A)Explain briefly about the training of workers (5)
(B)Write short notes on objectives of job evaluation and merit rating. (5) UNIT - II
23. (A)List the methods of Depreciation and explain any one. (5) (B)The original value of machine is Rs.30,000/-.Its expected life is 20 years. The scrap value is Rs.3000/-.Find out the depreciation per year in straight line method. (5)
24. Explain in detail about the procurement and consumption cycle with diagram. (10) UNIT - III
25. (A)Explain briefly about Quality statements . (5) (B)Write short notes on steps for continuous improvement. (5)
26. Explain in detail about Dimensions of Quality. (10)
UNIT - IV 27. (A)Explain briefly about the activity network diagram. (5)
(B)Explain any two QC Tools. (5) 28. Explain in detail about the control charts. (10)
UNIT - V
29. Explain in detail about 5S concepts. (10) 30. Explain in detail about the principles and requirements of QMS. (10)
Page 180 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM52 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject
Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM52
Embedded
Systems
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I ARM Processor Architecture 14
II ARM Instruction Sets and Interrupts 14
III LPC2148 ARM CPU 14
IV Cache Mechanism and Memory 14
V Embedded OS and RTOS 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 181 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
ARM PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
The RISC,CISC and ARM design-Philosophy ,Embedded System Hardware.
ARM PROCESSOR FUNDAMENTALS: Data Flow model, Registers, modes of
operation, Current Program Status Register, Pipeline, Exceptions,
Interrupts, and the Vector Table
ARM nomenclature and families. Big Endian and Little Endian.
14
II
ARM INSTRUCTIONS SETS AND INTERRUPTS:
ARM and Thumb Instruction Sets, Data Processing Instructions, Branch
Instructions, Load-Store Instructions, Software Interrupt Instruction,
Program Status Register Instructions, Conditional Execution, Stack
Instructions, Software Interrupt Instruction.
ARM PROCESSOR EXCEPTIONS AND MODES: vector table, priorities, link
Register offsets, interrupts, and IRQ / FIQ exceptions interrupt –stack
design and implementation.
SIMPLE PROGRAM: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication in assembly
language.
14
III
LPC 2148 ARM CPU
INTRODUCTION Architectural overview – Memory mapping – block
diagram
SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK FUNCTIONS
PLL – Power control – Reset – VPB divider – Wakeup Timer – Memory
Acceleration module – Timer 0 and timer 1 – PWM – RTC – On chip ADC –
Input/Output (GPIO) – Universal Asynchronous Receiver /Transmitter – I2C
Interface.
14
IV
CACHE MECHANISM AND MEMORY
Introduction to cache memory - memory hierarchy and cache memory -
Cache architecture and cache policies.
CONCEPT OF FLUSHING AND CLEANING CACHE: Flushing and Cleaning
ARM cache core.
CONCEPT OF CACHE LOCKDOWN: Locking Code and Data in Cache - Cache
and write buffer – Stack and stack pointer – Comparison of cache and stack.
MEMORY PROTECTION AND MANAGEMENT UNIT AND PERIPHERALS
Introduction to protection unit, Protected Regions - Demonstration of an
MPU system – Components of MPU – Importance of MPU – Memory
management unit block diagram – Main components of MMU- Definition of
virtual Memory – Virtual Memory – Working principle – Memory size &
speed – Importance of MMU.
Virtual Memory - working principle
14
Page 182 of 260
V
EMBEDDED OS AND RTOS
Fundamental Components to Embedded OS – Simple Little Operating
System: Initialization - memory model - interrupts and exceptions handling
- Scheduler, and context switch.
INTRODUCTION TO RTOS: Real-time systems concepts,
foreground/background systems, critical sections, resources, multitasking,
Context switching, scheduling, re-entrancy, task priorities, mutual
exclusion.
SYNCHRONIZATION AND IPC: Introduction to Semaphores and types.
Inter process communication: pipes and message box.
14
Text Books:
1. K.Meena ,Principles of digital electronics, PHI – 2011 2. R.P. Jain , Modern Digital Electronics, TMH 3. Rogers, Pennathur, Adams, Nano Technogy (Understanding Small Systems), CRC Press
Reference Books:
1. Albert Paul Malvino & Donald P.Leach , Digital principles & Applications, TMH- Second edition.
2. William H.Gothmann, Digital Electronics, prentice Hall of India- Second edition. 3. William Kleitz, Digital Electronics A Practical Approach, Prentice Hall. 4. Charles P.Poole Jr and Frank J.Owens, Introduction to Nano Technology, Wiley India Edition 5. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Micheal Simoms, Burkhard Raguse, Nano Technology (Basics science and Emerging Technologies), Overseas press India pvt. Ltd.,
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C302.1 Obtain knowledge about ARM processor architecture and ARM processor fundamentals
2 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C302.2
Describe the assembly level code for basic operations using instruction set and to implement them.
3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C302.3 Obtain knowledge about LPC2148 and its system control block functions.
2 3 2 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C302.4 Obtain knowledge about Cache memory mechanism and its importance.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 2
C302.5
Obtain knowledge on OS and RTOS ,Multitasking, Describe the functions of RTOS and carryout their applications, Explain multitasking, scheduling, IPC and synchronization.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C302.6 Describe the functional of RTOS and carry out their applications
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 16 18 12 8 4 - - - 12 12 16 16 16 15
AVG
2.66 3 2 1.33 0.66 - - - 2 2 2.66 2.66 2.66 2.5
Page 183 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time-Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code and Name: ECM52 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Note: 1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each)
2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each) 3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each)
4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Expand ARM. 2. Define Pipe-line. 3. What is the specialty of multiplication instruction. 4. What are the instructions used for controlling program status registers. 5. Expand PLL. 6. List the SFR’s of GPIO. 7. Define cache memory. 8. Define virtual memory. 9. Define Multitasking. 10. What is semaphore.
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Describe briefly the 3-stage pipe-lining. 12. Compare RISC and CISC architectures.
UNIT - II
13. Write short note on conditional Execution. 14. Write an assembly language program for 32 bit multiplication.
UNIT - III
15. Describe briefly about register map of ADC. 16. Write short notes on wake up timer.
UNIT - IV
17. Describe briefly about protected regions. 18. Write short notes on cleaning of ARM cache code.
UNIT -V
19. Describe briefly about context switching. 20. Write short notes on pipes.
Page 184 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I 21. Explain in detail about the Embedded system Hardware with neat diagram. (10) 22. (A)Draw the configuration of CPSR and explain (6)
(B)Write short notes on registers of ARM (4)
UNIT - II 23. (A)Explain in detail about shift instructions. (6)
(B)Write short notes on interrupt vector table. (4) 24. (A)Explain briefly about the IRQ/FIQ exceptions. (5)
(B)Write a note on stack instructions. (5)
UNIT - III 25. Explain in detail about the Memory Acceleration Module with neat diagram. (10) 26. Explain in detail about Architecture of UART with neat diagram. (10)
UNIT - IV 27. (A)Explain the cache replacement policies. (5)
(B)Write short notes on flushing of ARM cache core. (5) 28. Explain detail about the Demonstration of MPU system with neat diagram . (10)
UNIT - V
29 (A)Explain briefly about scheduling. (5) (B) Write short notes on mutual exclusion. (5)
30.Explain in detail about the fundamental components of Embedded OS. (10)
Page 185 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM53 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM53 Advanced
Communication
System
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Radar And Navigational Aids 14
II Digital Communication 14
III Optical Communication 14
IV Satellite Communication & Microwave Communication 14
V Mobile Communication 14
Revision and test 05
Total 75
Page 186 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS:
Basic Radar System– Applications – Radar range equation (qualitative
treatment only) – factors influencing maximum range – Basic Pulsed Radar
System – Block Diagram – Display Methods A - Scope, PPI Display –
Automatic target detection.
Radio aids to navigation – Direction finding using Radio compass –
Instrument landing system –Ground controlled approach system.
Telephony and fax: Telephone system – Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) – Electronic Switching System - Block diagram – ISDN –
Architecture, Features - Video phone – Block diagram
Facsimile communication system – facsimile sender-cylindrical scanning –
Facsimile receiver synchronization– phasing - Index of cooperation (IOC) -
Direct recording.
14
II
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Basic Elements of digital communication system – block diagram -
characteristics of data transmission circuits -Bandwidth requirement –
speed - Baud rate-Noise- crosstalk- Distortion – Equalizers – Echo
compressors
Digital codes – ASCII Code – EBCDIC Code - Error detection codes – Parity
check codes –Redundant codes - Error correction codes – Retransmission-
forward error correcting code –Hamming code.
Digital modulation techniques – ASK, FSK, PSK, QPSK
modulation/demodulation techniques (only block diagram and operation).
14
III
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
Optical communication system Block diagram –advantages of optical fiber
Communication systems – principles of light transmission in a fiber using
Ray Theory – Single mode fibers, multimode fibers – step index fibers,
graded index fibers (basic concepts only) – Attenuation in optical fibers –
Absorption losses, scattering losses, bending losses, core and cladding
losses. Optical sources – LED - semiconductor LASER – Principles – optical
detectors – PIN and APD diodes - Connectors - Splices – Couplers – optical
transmitter – Block diagram – optical receiver -Block diagram - Application
of optical fibers. Networking-industry and military applications
14
Page 187 of 260
IV
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION& MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION Satellite system- Decibles Kepler’s I,II,II laws – orbits – types-
Geostationary synchronous satellites- Advantages – Apogee Perigee- Active
and passive satellite—Earth eclipse of satellite - Parabolic reflector antenna
–cassegrain antenna.
Space segment- power supply- Attitude control- station keeping –
Transponders – TT and C subsystem – Thermal control – Antenna
subsystem.
Earth segment—Block diagram of Transmit receive earth station. Satellite
mobile services - Basics of GPS.
Microwave Communication-microwave frequency ranges-micro wave
devices –Parametric amplifiers-travelling wave tubes-simple block diagram
of micro wave transmitter ,receiver and microwave link repeater
–parametric amplifiers
MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION
14
V
MOBILE COMMUNICATION:(Qualitative Treatment only)
Cellular telephone– fundamental concepts – Simplified Cellular telephone
system - frequency reuse – Interference – Co – Channel Interference –
Adjacent Channel Interference – Improving coverage and capacity in
cellular systems - cell splitting – sectoring - Roaming and Handoff-Basics of
blue tooth technology
Satellite multiple Access techniques – TDMA, FDMA, CDMA.
Digital cellular system – Global system for mobile communications (GSM) –
GSM services – GSM System Architecture – Basics of CDMA - Basics of
GPRS-GPS (Basic Idea)-GPS antenna.
14
Text Books:
1. Kennedy - Davis, Electronic communication systems - Kennedy – Davis, fourth Edition - Tata McGraw Hill - 1999.
2. Dennis Roddy and John coolen , Electronics communication ,Third Edition - PHI – 1988
Reference Books: 1. Gerd Keiser , Optical fiber communication, Third Edition - McGraw Hill - 2000 2. Dr. D.C. Agarwal , Satellite communication, Third Edition - Khanna publishers - 1995 3. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communications systems - Fundamentals through Advanced,
Fifth Edition.
Page 188 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C303.1
Explain about basic radar system, radio aids to navigation, telephony and fax, facsimile communication.
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C303.2
Explain about basic elements of digital communication system, digital codes and digital modulation techniques.
3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C303.3
Explain about the optical communication system block diagram for transmitter & receiver section, principles of light transmission, optical sources, optical detectors, connectors and couplers.
3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C303.4
Explain satellite communication block diagram ,types of orbit earth and space segment ,types of antenna used.
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C303.5
Describe the fundamental concepts of microwave communication with block diagram and microwave devices,microwave link repeater
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C303.6
Describe the fundamental concepts of cellular telephone, cell coverage,roaming,types of satellite multiple access technique,GSM &GPRS.
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 12 18 4 - - - - 12 12 - - - -
Ave 3 2 3 0.66 - - - - 2 2 2.83 2.83 2.83 2.83
Page 189 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75 Subject Code & Name: ECM53 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each) 3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. State radar range equation. 2. Define IOC. 3. What is meant by cross talk? 4. Define PSK modulation? 5. What is meant by critical angle? 6. Define transponder. 7. Define Kepler’s 1st law. 8. List out any two microwave devices. 9. What is microcell? 10. Define footprint
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Write short note on PPI display. 12. Draw the schematic diagram of cylindrical scanning.
UNIT - II
13. Describe about distortion in digital communication. 14. Write short notes on odd parity and even parity.
UNIT - III
15. Compare single mode and multi-mode fiber. 16. Write short note on LED as source.
UNIT - IV
17. Discuss about GEO stationary satellite orbit. 18. Write short note on earth eclipse of satellite.
UNIT - V
19. Describe about the working of Co-channel interference. 20. Write shout note on Roaming and handoff.
Page 190 of 260
Part C (10x5=50) UNIT - I
21. Explain the operation of Electronic switching system with its neat sketch. (10) 22. With neat diagram explain the working of video phone. (10)
UNIT - II
23. Explain any five characteristics of digital transmission circuits. (10) 24. Draw and explain ASK modulator and demodulator . (10)
UNIT - III
25. Explain the principle of light transmission in a fiber using ray theory. (10) 26. Draw and explain the working principle of LASER. (10)
UNIT – IV
27. With neat sketch explain the working principle of Cassegrain antenna. (10) 28. Explain with a neat diagram the working operation of TWT. (10)
UNIT - V
29. Explain simplified cellular telephone system. (10) 30. Explain the operation of GSM architecture. (10)
Page 191 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM54.1 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM54.1 Digital
Communication
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Basics of digital communication 14
II Waveform Coding Techniques, Formatting and Base Band
Modulation 14
III Data Communication Code And Baseband Coding techniques
14
IV Digital Modulation techniques 14
V Spread Spectrum Techniques 14
Revision and test 05
Total 75
Page 192 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
BASICS OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATION Digital communication signal processing–Typical Block diagram and
transformations-Advantages over analog communication–Characters of
data communication system -Channels for Digital communication-
Telephone, Optical fiber, Satellite and computers.
Classification of signals-deterministic and random signals-periodic and non-
periodic signals–analog and discrete signals-energy and power signals -
unit, impulse function. Information capacity (Definition only)–Shannon’s
limit for information capacity (Definition only)-Data transmission-Serial and
parallel transmission -Synchronous and asynchronous transmission.
14
II
WAVEFORM CODING TECHNIQUES,FORMATTING AND BASE BAND
MODULATION
Pulse modulation-types(to list only)-Generation and Reception of PCM-
Delta modulation-Block diagram of transmitter and receiver-advantages
&disadvantages-Adaptive Delta modulation-Block diagram of transmitter
and receiver-Differential PCM(DPCM) - Block diagram of transmitter and
receiver- advantages & limitation of DPCM
Base band system-The Sampling Theorem–-Quantization noise–channel
effects–channel noise–PCM-Uniform and Non-uniform Quantization,
Baseband transmission, PCM waveform types-non return-to-zero(NRZ)-
return-to-zero(RZ)-phase encoded–spectral attributes of PCM waveforms–
Bits per PCM word and Bits per symbol-PCM word size-M-ary pulse
modulation waveforms.
14
III
DATA COMMUNICATION CODE AND BASEBAND CODING TECHNIQUES
Rationale for coding–Types of codes ASCII code, EBCDIC code, Baudot code, parity coding-odd and even parity coding, Redundant codes. Discrete memory less channel.
Error control coding methods–forward error correction–error detection with retransmission–types of errors–random error and burst error– Principles of linear block codes–Hamming code–Binary cyclic codes– Cyclic redundancy check code (CRC)–Fundamentals of Convolution coding.
14
IV
DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES
Digital modulation techniques–Listing of various types -Generation and
reception of FSK,ASK,PSK,QPSK(block diagram and explanation only–
Coherent binary modulation techniques –Coherent quadrature modulation
techniques– Non Coherent binary modulation techniques-Minimum shift
keying(MSK)-Block diagram of MSK transmitter and receiver.
14
Page 193 of 260
TDM-Frame structure, ASCII framing- E1 Framing, T1 Framing for
telephone. Detection of signals–coherent detection of PSK–sampled
matched filter– coherent detection of FSK–Non-coherent detection-Binary
differential PSK
V
SPREAD SPECTRUM TECHNIQUES Definition-applications-classification of spread spectrum-Spread spectrum
communication- Beneficial attributes of spread spectrum systems–Pseudo
noise sequences–Randomness properties–Balance property, Run property
and Correlation property-Direct sequence spread spectrum systems-
transmitter-receiver-Coherent BPSK-transmitter-Receiver–Applications.
Processing gain and performance–Frequency hopping spread spectrum
systems–Frequency hopping with diversity–fast hopping versus slow
hopping–Synchronization–Jamming consideration–Commercial application
– CDMA Digital cellular system.
14
Text Books:
1. Simon Haykins , Digital communication , Wiley India Edition – 2006
2. J.S.Chitode, Principles of Digital communication, Tech. Publications – Pune - 2008
Reference Books:
1. P.Ramakrishna Rao , Digital communication, TMH – 2011
2. NIIT, Introduction to Digital Communication System, PHI Learning Private Ltd,
NewDelhi
3. Taub & Schilling , Principles of communication systems, TMH- Third Edition -
2008.
Page 194 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Subject Code and Name: ECM 54.1 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION Maximum Marks: 75
Time-3 Hours
Note: 1. Answer ALL the questions in PART-A (1 mark each)
2. Answer any ONE questions from each UNIT in PART-B (3 marks each)
3. Answer any ONE question from each UNIT in PART-C (10 marks each)
4. The question paper contains TWO pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. Define sampling. 2. What is meant by random signals? 3. What are the types of PCM waveforms? 4. Expand DPCM. 5. Expand EBCDIC. 6. Define code rate in convolution coding. 7. What do you mean by keying?. 8. Which type of framing is used in telephone? 9. Define processing gain. 10. Define spread spectrum
Part B (3 x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. List the channels used in digital communication system. 12. Describe briefly about information capacity.
UNIT – II
13. List the pulse modulation.
14. Describe briefly about Companding.
UNIT - III
15. Describe briefly about ASCII code. 16. Describe about E! framing
UNIT - IV
17. List the digital modulation techniques. 18. Write short notes on retransmission in error detection.
UNIT -V
19. Describe briefly about pseudo noise generator. 20. Write short notes on frequency hopping.
Page 195 of 260
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I
21. Explain about the digital communication system with block diagram. (10) 22. (A)Describe about synchronous transmission (5) (B)Write short notes serial transmission. (5)
UNIT - II
23. Explain about the operation DPCM transmitter and receiver with block diagram.(10)
24. Explain about PCM uniform and non-uniform quantization. (10)
UNIT - III
25. Explain in detail about parity coding. (10) 26. Explain in detail about convolution coding. (10).
UNIT - IV
27. Explain about the operation QPSK transmitter and receiver with block diagram (10) 28. Explain in detail about Binary differential PSK. (10).
UNIT - V
29. Explain in detail about the coherent BPSK transmitter with diagram (10)
30. Explain in detail about the CDMA digital cellular system. (10)
Page 196 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM54.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM54.2
Programmable
Logic Controller
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duratio
n in
Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller 14
II Input and Output Modules 14
III PLC Programming 14
IV Networking 14
V Data Acquisition Systems 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 197 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
PLC evolution – hardwire control system compared with PLC system -
advantages of PLCs – criteria for selection of suitable PLC - Block diagram
of PLC – principle of operation – CPU – memory organization – I/O
modules –Input types – Logic, Analog – pulse train – expansion modules –
power supplies to PLC – modular PLCs - list of various PLCs available.
14
II
INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES
Input modules: Discrete input module – AC input module – DC input
module – sinking and sourcing – sensor input – special input modules –
Sensors – limit switch, reed switch, photo electric sensor, inductive
proximity sensor – Input Addressing scheme in important commercial
PLCs.
Output modules: Discrete output module – TTL output module – Relay
output – Isolated output module – surge suppression in output – Analog
outputs – open collector output. Output Addressing scheme in important
commercial PLCs.
14
III
PLC PROGRAMMING
Symbols used – relays and logic functions –OR, AND, Comparator -
Programming Devices – programming methods – STL and CSF, FBD and
Ladder methods – simple instructions – Programming NC and NO contacts
- EXAMINE ON and EXAMINE OFF instructions - online, offline methods–
Latch and Unlatch outputs – pulse edge evaluation – timer instructions –
on-delay and off-delay timer. Counter instructions – UP / DOWN counters
– Timer and Counter applications. Program control instructions – Data
manipulating instructions – Math instructions. Converting simple relay
ladder diagram into PLC relay ladder diagram – PID and PWM functions.
Sample PLC implementations for Automatic Star-Delta Starter and 4- floor
Lift system.
14
Page 198 of 260
IV
NETWORKING
Levels of industrial control – types of networking – network
communications – principles – transmission media – Field Bus –
introduction, concepts, international field bus standards – Networking
with TCP / IP Protocol – Network architecture – Physical addressing – LAN
technologies –Ethernet – Token Ring – Sub-netting – subnet mask –
transport layer – ports sockets network services – file transfer protocol.
14
V
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS
Computers in Process control – Data Loggers – Data acquisition
systems(DAS) – Alarms – Direct Digital Control (DDC) - Characteristics of
digital data– Controller software – Computer Process interface for Data
Acquisition and control –Supervisory Digital Control (SCADA) -introduction
and brief history of SCADA – SCADA Hardware and software
14
Text Book:
1. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller Gary Dunning Thomson Delmar learning
Reference Books:
1. John W Webb Ronald A, Programmable Logic Controllers; Principles and applications, Rels PHI Learning Pvt Ltd 2012
2. Srivastava , Exploring Programmable Logic Controllers with applications, BPB Publishers 2012
3. Vijay R Yadhav , Programmable Logic Controllers , Khanna Publishers 4. Programmable Logic Controllers; Principles and applications NIIT 2010
Page 199 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C304.1
Describe the internal structure, interface modules, memory organization, advantages of PLC
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C304.2 Invoke the various types of input, output modules and various types of sensors used.
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C304.3 Obtain knowledge of programming methods and developing ladder programs
3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C304.4
Describe the different layers of TCP/IP & their functions. Apply the concepts of physical addressing ,Ethernet ,token ring, sub netting, and file transfer protocol
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C304.5
Bring out the concepts data acquisition system, Direct Digital control and explain about SCADA.
3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 3
Total 15 10 15 2 - - - - 10 10 - - - -
Ave 3 2 3 0.4 - - - - 2 2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4
Page 200 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM54.3 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM54.3 Electronic System Design
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessmen
t
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
TOPICS AND ALLOCATION:
UNIT Name of the Topic Hours
I Power supplies 14
II Amplifier, Voltage to current and current to voltage converter 14
III ADC, DAC, Instrumentation amplifier and transducer 14
IV Signal generators 14
V Microcontroller based application 14
Revision ,Test 05
TOTAL 75
Page 201 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT NAME OF THE TOPIC HOURS
I DESIGN OF POWER SUPPLY DC power supply with filters- Regulators and their types - Protection
circuits - Multi output and variable power supply design-Rectifiers –
types- half wave,full wave.
14
II DESIGN OF SMALL SIGNALAMPLIFIERS CB,CE configuration – Emitter follower - Darlington pair amplifiers
with and without – Bootstrapping - Two stage direct coupled
amplifiers-Design of audio power amplifier with drivers- Design of
simple PA system- Voltage to current converter, current to voltage
converter
14
III DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM Analog to digital converter (ADC)- Digital to analog converter (DAC) -
Design of Instrumentation amplifier with the bridge type– transducer
–Temperature measurement - Design of Electronic voltmeter and
ammeter - Design of–multimeter-Display system.
14
IV DESIGN OF FUNCTION GENERATORS Design of AM signal using multiplier IC - AM signal demodulation
using envelope detector - Design of FM signal modulator using
VCO(IC NE566) -FM signal demodulation using phase discriminator
and ratio detector.
14
V HIGH VOLTAGE/HIGH CURRENT DRIVER Circuit for Relay and motor control applications - Microcontroller
based closed loop system- Security systems, Scrolling display-
Microcontroller based stepper motor - Microcontroller based
temperature sensor and relay.
14
Revision & Test 05
Page 202 of 260
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A Monograph on Electronics Design Principles - N.C.Goyel, R.K.Khetan, Khanna Publishers -Second Edition
2. Electronic devices and circuits - Allen Mottershead, Prentice hall of india pvt., limited,
19thedition, 1997 3. The art of electronics - Paul Horowitz, Cambridge University-2nd edition 4. 8051 Micro controllers - Mazidi and D.Mackinlay, Pearson education , low price
edition,2006
Page 203 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM55 EMBEDDED SYSTEM PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM55 Embedded
System Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
4 60
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. STUDY OF THE PROCESSOR KIT (whatever the ARM processor kit the institution is having) Example: LPC2148 The student should able to understand the memory mapping of the IO and peripherals List the peripherals present in the processor Explain that how to use an IO pin, related SFRs and instructions Explain that how to use timer, UART, its related SFR and instructions sets
2. ARITHMETIC OPERATION ON ARM IN ASSEMBLY Develop an assembly level code for the single precision (32 bit) arithmetic function. a. Addition, b. Subtraction and c. Multiplication 3. SIMPLE LED BLINKING WITH VARIABLE SPEED IN ASM Develop an assembly level program of ARM processor to blink a LED (including delay routine) in Variable speed in the trainer kit. 4. REALIZATION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT PORT IN ASM Develop an assembly level program of ARM processor to read a port in which switches are Connected in the trainer kit. Send back the receive input to output in which LEDs are connected in the trainer kit
Page 204 of 260
5. SIMPLE LED BLINKING WITH VARIABLE SPEED IN C Develop a C program for ARM processor to blink a LED (including delay routine) in variable speed. 6. RELAY INTERFACE WITH LPC 2148 IN C Develop a C program for ARM processor to interface a Relay interface with LPC 2148 including delay routine. 7. BUZZER INTERFACE WITH LPC 2148 ARM IN C Develop a C program for ARM processor to interface a Buzzer LPC 2148 including delay routine. 8. SEVEN SEGMENT LED DISPLAY INTERFACE IN C Develop a C program for ARM processor to interface a seven segment LED display with delay routine. 9. ACCESSING INTERNAL ADC OF THE ARM PROCESSOR AND TO DISPLAY IN LCD Write a C Programs for reading an ADC; convert into decimal and to display in LCD. The ADC input is connected any analog sensor. 10. DISPLAYING ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS IN 2X16 LINE LCD MODULE Write a C Programs for displaying a number and an alphanumeric in the LCD module. The display should come in the desired line and column. 11. ACCESSING INTERNAL RTC OF THE ARM PROCESSOR AND TO DISPLAY IN LCD Write a C Programs for setting and reading the RTC. Convert the read data into decimal and to display it. 12. READ KEY INPUT FROM MATRIX KEYPAD INTERFACE AND DISPLAY ON SEVEN SEGMENT LED Write a C Programs for reading a key input from matrix keypad interface and display on seven segments LED. 13. SIMPLE LED BLINKING WITH VARIABLE SPEED IN C BY IMPLEMENTING MULTITASKING Develop RTOS program for ARM processor to blink a LED (including delay routine) in variable speed. 14. SERIAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OF A STRING IN C BY RTOS Write a RTOS Programs for receiving a character from other device (Computer) and send the next character of the received one to the device back by implementing priority scheduling. 15. INTERFACING STEPPER MOTOR IN ARM PROCESSOR BY USING RTOS Write C programs for running stepper motor either in clock wise or counter clock wise. The speed of rotation can be changed by implementing RTOS delay functions.
Page 205 of 260
16. INTERFACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR with LPC2148 AND DISPLAY IN LCD Write a C Programs for reading and Temperature sensor; convert into decimal and to display in LCD.
List of Equipments
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
LPC 2148 Trainer kit:11 Nos
LED Interface module kit : 2 Nos
4 X 4 Matrix Keypad interfacing kit: 2Nos
Relay and buzzer interface kit : 2 Nos
Stepper motor Interfacing kits:2 Nos
Desktop Computer System: 20Nos SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Tools: TRITON, KEIL C
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Algorithm 15
2 Program 25
3 Execution 20
4 Result 10
5 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 206 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C305.1
Analyse the functioning of memory mapping,io peripherals ,io pins and their related SFR’S
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 2 2 3
C305.2
implement the instruction set and right the code for arithmetic operation and basic interfaces
3 2 3 2 1 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C305.3
Obtain knowledge on programming circuitry using serial and parallel port and relay and buzzer program to execute them
3 2 3 2 1 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C305.4
Apply program control structures,rtos functions and implement them.
3 2 3 2 1 - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C305.5
Use analog or digital convert a portd to interrupt with external circuitry and put them in to practice.
3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C305.6
Invoke the knowledge on RTOS functions and execute them
3 2 3 2 1 - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 12 18 12 5 - - 18 12 12 - - - -
Ave 3 2 3 2 0.83 - - 3 2 2 2.5 2.33 2.33 2.5
Page 207 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: ECM56 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM56 Advanced Communication Systems Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
6 90
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Trace the output waveform of a PSK modulation/demodulation circuit
2. Find the output of a ASK Modulation/ demodulation circuit.
3. Determine the output of a FSK Transmitter/ Receiver.
4. Trace the output waveform of a QPSK modulation/demodulation circuit
5. Determine the output of DPCM.
6. Determine the output of DM and ADM.
7. Determine the output of a TDM signal.
8. Construct a circuit to find the given LED and Photo diode characteristics
9. Set up a fiber optic analog link
10. Set up a fiber optic digital link
11. Measure the bending loss and propagation loss in fiber optics.
12. Test the performance of Manchester encoder and decoder
13. Measure the Numerical aperture of optical fiber
14. Construct & test a voice link using Optical fiber
15. Install & test a DTH system.
Page 208 of 260
List of Equipments
Reference:
Lab manual, “Advanced Communication Systems Practical”, MPC.D.7.09.ECM55
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Circuit Diagram 20
2 Connection & Handling the Equipment 25
3 Tabulation, Calculation / Graph 15
4 Result 10
5 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
S.No Name of the Equipments Range Required Nos
1. PSK modulation/demodulation - 1
2. ASK Modulation/ demodulation - 1
3. FSK Transmitter/ Receiver - 1
4. QPSK modulation/demodulation - 1
5. DPCM - 1
6. DM and ADM - 1
7. TDM - 1
8. LED and Photo diode - 1
9. fiber optic - 2
10. DTH system - 1
11 Dual trace CRO 20Mhz 5
Page 209 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C306.1
Able to carry out the performance of PSK, ASK, FSK, QPSK modulation & demodulation.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C306.2 Able to carry out the performance of DPCM, DM, ADM and TDM signal.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C306.3 Carry out the experiment to find the LED& Photodiode characteristics in optical fiber.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C306.4 Bring out the performance analog link,digital link and types of losses in optical fiber
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C306.5
Able to calculate and test the performance of Manchester encoder and decoder, numerical aperture and test voice link using optical fibre
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C306.6 Able to demonstrate the procedure Install & test the performance of DTH system.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
Total 18 12 18 12 - - - 18 12 12 - - - -
Ave 3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.67
Page 210 of 260
Course Name: DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : V
Subject Code & Name: GEM57 LIFE AND EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in
Hours
Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Examination
Total
3
GEM 57
Life and
Employability
Skills Practical
4 60 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
UNIT TOPICS HOURS
I LISTENING 15
II SPEAKING 25
III READING 5
IV WRITING 10
V PROJECT OUTLINE 5
TOTAL 60
Page 211 of 260
RATIONALE
Good Communication Skills plays a vital role in one’s career. There are adequate Employment
opportunities in all the sectors. Students need to enhance their Communication skills in English in order to
cope with the tough competition. Besides, mastery in their specific domains students are expected to
overcome the supply - demand mismatch.
UNIT TOPICS ACTIVITY HOURS
I LISTENING Taking notes
Answering verbal questions
Fill in the blanks with words heard
15
II SPEAKING Say expressions / phrases
Self-Introduction / others
Describe / Explain product
Group Discussion
Dialogue
Presentation
25
III READING Productivity – Comparison with developed Countries
House Keeping in Industries
Occupational Safety and Hazard & Occupational Accident and First Aid
Marketing Analysis, Support & Procurement
Entrepreneurship
National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCTCR)
Protection of Children from sexual Offenses (POCSO Act and Rule of POCSO Rules, 2012)
5
IV WRITING Instant Sentence Making
Framing questions
Resume writing
Make Sentence using pattern
Important Constitutional and Legal Provision for women in India
The Harassment of women at workplace (Prevention and Prohibition & Redressal ) Act 2013)
Guidelines and Norms laid down by the Honourable Supreme Court in VISHAKA and Others
10
V PROJECT
OUTLINE
Prepare an outline of project to obtain loan from bank 5
Page 212 of 260
FOR RECORD NOTE WRITING -
General Topics:
1. Productivity in Industries – Comparison with Developed Countries.
2. House-keeping in Industries.
3. Occupational Safety and Hazard & Occupational Accident and First Aid.
4. Entrepreneurship.
5. Marketing Analysis, Support and Procurement.
Writing Exercises:
1. Taking Down Notes (Listening)
2. Framing Questions
3. Making Sentences
4. Resume Writing
1. Project Outline
2. Instant Sentence Making
3. Say in phrases/Expressions
Speaking Exercise: Presentation Skills
1. Decision Making
2. Problem Solution
3. Creative Thinking/Lateral Thinking
4. Critical Thinking/ Perspicacity
5. Effective Communication
1. Interpersonal relationships
2. Self-awareness/Mindfulness
3. Assertiveness
4. Empathy
5. Equanimity
6. Coping with Stress, Trauma and Loss
NOTE: Students can choose any topic and present in Quality Tools, Quality Circles and Quality
Consciousness depicting these topics.
Text Book: “LIFE AND EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS PRACTICAL BOOK” , Ms.S.Rajalakshmi,
Ms.S.Anandhi
Page 213 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C307.1 Listen effectively and respond accordingly
3 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
C307.2
Prepare and perform oral presentation for different situations related with employment
3 3 2 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2 2 1 2
C307.3 Express views and opinions on employability related skills
3 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
C307.4 Read and write notes on industrial safety, housekeeping, productivity and other industrial related issues
3 3 2 2 2 - - 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
C307.5 Understand the basics of entrepreneurship and its implementation in real situations
3 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
C307.6 Apply various Industrial Acts including Children and women’s Act.
3 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
C307.7 Prepare comprehensive resume and project report covering all professional aspects.
3 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
Total 21 21 14 14 14 - 10 21 14 14 - - - -
Ave 3 3 2 2 2 - 1.42 3 2 2 2.13 1.86 1 2.57
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Listening 25
2 Speaking 25 3 Writing and Reading 20
4 Viva Voce 5
Total 75
Page 214 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name : ECM61 COMPUTER HARDWARE SERVICING AND NETWORKING
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination ECM61 Computer
Hardware Servicing
and Networking
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semeste
r
Marks Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Motherboard components and memory storage devices 14
II I/O devices and interface 14
III Maintenance and trouble shooting of desktop and laptops 14
IV Computer network devices and OSI layers 14
V 802.x and TCP/IP protocols 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 215 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
I
MOTHERBOARD COMPONENTS AND MEMORY STORAGE
Introduction: Parts - Mother board, I/O & expansion slots, memory, SMPS, power supply, drives and front panel and rear panel connectors – Hardware, Software and Firmware.
Processors: Pentium I, II, III, IV ,i3, i5, i7 - features ;Architecture and block diagram of multi-core Processor, Features of new processor(Definition only)-chipsets (Concepts only)
Bus Standards Overview and features of PCI, AGP, ISA, EISA, USB, PCMCIA, Processor BUS - High Speed Bus
Primary Memory: Introduction-Main Memory, Cache memory –DDR2-DDR3, RAM versions – 1TB RAM – Direct RDRAM
Secondary Storage: Hard Disk – Construction – Working Principle –Specification of IDE, Ultra ATA, Serial ATA; HDD Partition - Formatting. Troubleshooting hard disk drives.
Removable Storage device: CD&DVD construction – reading & writing operations; CD-R,CD-RW; DVD-ROM, DVD-RW; construction and working of DVD Reader / Writer. Blue-ray: Introduction – Disc Parameters – Recording and Playback Principles –Solid state memory devices (Definition & types only), various type of memory card in mobile and in camera.
14
II
I/O DEVICES AND INTERFACE
Keyboard and Mouse: Keyboard: Signals – operation of membrane and mechanical keyboards–troubleshooting; wireless Keyboard, PS II, UBS interface. Mouse- types, connectors, operation of Optical mouse and Troubleshooting.
Printers: Introduction – Types of printers–dot matrix printer, Inkjet, Laser, MFP (Multi-Function Printer) & Thermal printer - Operation – Construction – Features and Troubleshooting.
I/O Ports: Serial, Parallel, USB, Game Port, Bluetooth interface, Touch screen – capacity and working, IR connector, Signal specification problems with interfaces.
Displays and Graphic Cards: Panel Displays– Principles of LED, LCD and TFT Displays. SVGA Port signals – common problems and solutions.
14
Page 216 of 260
Modem: Working principles – Broadband modems only (USB) – common problems and solutions, types of Modem –wired, wireless.
Power Supply: Principles of Operation and Block Diagram of ATX Power Supply.
III
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING OF DESKTOP AND LAPTOPS
Bios-setup: Standard CMOS setup, Advanced BIOS setup, Power management, advanced chipset features, Drivers and driver’s software ,PC Bios communication– upgrading BIOS, Flash BIOS -setup.
POST: Definition – IPL hardware – POST Test sequence – beep codes and error messages.
Diagnostic Software and Viruses: Computer Viruses – Precautions – Anti-virus Software – identify the signature of viruses – Firewalls and latest -diagnostic software’s.
Laptop: Difference between laptop and desktop- Types of laptop – block diagram – working principles–configuring laptops and power settings –SMD & components ESD and precautions.
Laptop components: Adapter – types, Battery – types and basic problems, RAM– types, CPU – types, Laptop Mother Board - block diagram, Laptop Keyboard –Mouse and Touchpad - Ports.
Installation and Troubleshooting: Formatting, Partitioning and Installation of OS – Trouble Shooting Laptop Hardware problems – Preventive maintenance techniques for laptops.
14
IV
COMPUTER NETWORK DEVICES AND OSI LAYERS
Data Communication: Components of a data communication – Data flow: simplex – half duplex – full duplex; Networks – Definition - Network criteria – Types of Connections: Point to point – multipoint; Topologies: Star, Bus, Ring, and Mesh, Hybrid – Advantages and Disadvantages of each topology.
Networks: Definition-Types of Networks: LAN-MAN-WAN-CAN-HAN-Internet-Intranet-Extranet, Client-Server, Peer to Peer Networks.
Network devices: Features and concepts of Switches – Routers (Wired and Wireless) – Gateways, Manageable software and non-manageable software.
Network Models: WiFi networks, Protocol definition - standards - OSI Model – layered architecture – functions of all layers.
14
Page 217 of 260
V
802.X AND TCP/IP PROTOCOLS
Overview of TCP / IP: OSI & TCP/IP – Transport Layers Protocol – connection oriented and connectionless Services – Sockets - TCP & UDP.
802.X Protocols : Concepts and PDU format of CSMA/CD (802.3) – Token bus (802.4) – Token ring (802.5) – Ethernet – type of Ethernet (Fast Ethernet, gigabit Ethernet) – Comparison between 802.3, 802.4 and 802.5
Network Layers Protocol: IP –Interior Gateway Protocols (IGMP, ICMP, ARP, RARP Concept only).
IP Addressing : Dotted Decimal Notation –Sub netting & Super netting – VLSM Technique-IPv6-Remote login (concepts only)
Application Layer Protocols: FTP Telnet – SMTP– HTTP – DNS – POP.
14
Text Books:
1. B.Govindrajalu, IBM PC and CLONES, Tata McGrawhill Publishers, IBM PC and CLONES 2. D.Balasubramanian, Computer Installation and Servicing, Tata McGraw Hill 3. Computer Installation and Servicing 4. Mark Minasi, The complete PC upgrade and Maintenance, BPB Publication, The Complete PC upgrade and Maintenance 5. Stephen J Bigelow , Troubleshooting, Maintaining and Repairing PCs, Tata MCGraw Hill Publication ,Troubleshooting Maintaining and Repairing PCs 6. Scott Mueller,Upgrading and repairing laptops, QUE Publication, Upgrading and repairing laptops
7. Behrouz A.Forouzan, Data Communication and networking, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi 8. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Prentice-Hall of India, Eighth Edition 9. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi
Reference Books:
1. Achyut Godbole, Computer Networks, Tata Mc-Graw Hill -New Delhi 2. Kaveh Pahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurty , Principles of Wireless Networks– A Unified Approach, Pearson Education, 2002
Page 218 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO’S CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C308.1 Describe motherboard components , bus standards & memory devices
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C308.2 Explain the I/O devices and interfaces
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C308.3 Describe about BIOS setup and its settings
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2
C308.4 Explain the maintenance and trouble shooting of desktop and laptop.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 3 2
C308.5 Explain data communication , network types , devices and models
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C308.6 Describe 802.X and TCP/IP protocol
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
Total 18 18 12 12 12 - - - 12 12 - - - -
Ave 3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2.67 2.67 2.67 2.5
Page 219 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM61 COMPUTER HARDWARE, SERVICING AND NETWORKING
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each)
2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
PART – A (1 X 10 = 10)
1. What is primary memory?
2. Expand CD & DVD.
3. What is serial I/O port?
4. What is SVGA port signal?
5. What is POST?
6. What is touchpad in laptop?
7. What is full duplex data flow?
8. What is gateway in network?
9. What is TCP/IP?
10. What is telnet service?
PART – B (3 x5=15)
UNIT - I
11. Discuss in brief about the recording & playback principles of Blu-ray disc.
12. Give a brief note on solid state memory devices.
UNIT – II
13. With a neat diagram explain the operation of MODEM.
14. Briefly explain the operation & method of cleaning Optical Mouse.
UNIT – III
15. Discuss in breif about POST test sequence & its activities.
16. How will you identify the signature of viruses?
Page 220 of 260
UNIT – IV
17. Write a note on Network Components & connectors with neat diagram.
18. Describe the features & concepts of switches.
UNIT – V
19. Distinguish between TCP & UDP.
20. Write short notes on the types of ethernet.
PART - C (10x5=50)
UNIT – I
21. Explain in detail about the architecture of multicore processor with neat diagram. (10)
22. Explain with neat diagram, the construction ,working principle & partitioning of
hard disk. (10)
UNIT – II
23. Draw the block diagram & explain the operation of the plasma & TFT display. (10)
24. Draw & explain the operation & the block diagram of ATX power supply
Connection. (10)
UNIT - III
25. Explain in brief about the preventive maintenance techniques adopted for
Laptops. (10)
26. Write short notes on:
A) i) Antivirus software ii) Latest diagnostic software (5)
B) Explain the steps for systematic troubleshooting of a laptop. (5)
UNIT – IV
27. Explain the various network topologies with its advantages & its disadvantages. (10)
28. Explain in detail about the various layers & functions of OSI model. (10)
UNIT – V
29. Explain in brief about the concepts PPDU format of CSMA/CD. (10)
30. A)Explain in brief about the following network layer protocols (10)
i) IGMP ii) ICMP iii) ARP
B) Compare the OSI with TCP/IP reference model
Page 221 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM62 AUTOMATED TEST SYSTEM
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code & Name Instruction Examination
ECM62 Automated
Test System
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semeste
r
Marks Duratio
n in
Hours 5 75
Continuous
Assessment
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit TOPIC Hrs
I Introduction To Test Engineering 14
II Automated Testing Methods And Technology 14
III V-I(SIGNATURE) Testing Methods And Technology 14
IV Boundary scan Testing Methods And Technology 14
V ATE Test Program Generation And Semiconductor Testing
14
Revision & Test 05
TOTAL 75
Page 222 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT NAME OF THE TOPIC HOURS
I INTRODUCTION TO TEST ENGINEERING.
Need and Importance of Test Engineering – Principles of Fundamental Testing
Methods – Basic Principles of Memory Testing – PCB Track Short Testing Methods –
Concepts of Trouble Shooting PCBs - Manual and Automated PCB Trouble Shooting
Techniques.
14
II
AUTOMATED TESTING METHODS AND TECHNOLOGY
Introduction to Automated Test Techniques – Fundamental of Digital Logic
Families- Concepts of Back-Driving /Node Forcing Technique and its International
Defense Standard- Concepts of Digital Guarding - Auto Compensation – Clock
Termination– Functional Test Methods - Functional Testing of Digital, Analog and
Mixed Integrated Circuit – Different types of Memory Module Functional Test.
14
III
V-I(SIGNATURE)TESTING METHODS AND TECHNOLOGY
Fundamentals of Electrical Characteristics - Effects of Curve Trace, Characteristics
of Passive and Active Components -Understanding Composite VI-Curve and it
deviations – Component Identification of Ageing Effects with VI Curve Trace, Input
and Output Characteristics of Digital Integrated Circuits-Good Versus Suspect
interpretation Comparison.
14
IV
BOUNDARY SCAN TESTING METHODS AND TECHNOLOGY
Introduction to Boundary Scan– Need of Boundary Scan Test Technique - Principle
of Boundary Scan Test –Boundary Scan Architecture - Application of Boundary
Scan Test- Boundary Scan Standards – Boundary Scan Description Language(BSDL)
– Interconnect test – Serial Vector Format (SVF) Test -Basic of JTAG Port - Digital
Integrated Circuit Test using Boundary Scan Techniques.
14
V
ATE TEST PROGRAM GENERATION AND SEMICONDUCTOR TESTING
ATE in PCB Test – Test Fixtures - Basics of Automatic Test Program Generation -
Standard Test Data Format STDF– Basic of Digital Simulator- Introduction to
Semiconductor Test, Use of Load Boards.
14
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Test Engineering for Electronic Hardware – S R Sabapathi, Qmax Test
Equipments P Ltd., 2011.
2. Practical Electronic Fault Finding and Troubleshooting by Robin Pain Newnes,
Reed Educational and professional publishing Ltd., 1996
3.The Fundamentals of Digital Semiconductor Testing, Floyd, Pearson Education
India, Sep-2005
Page 223 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C309.1
Describe the principles of fundamental testing methods, memory testing, and PCB track short methods.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
2 2 2 2
C309.2 Describe the concepts of manual and automated PCB troubleshooting techniques.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
C309.3 Explain the automated testing methods and different types of memory module function test.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
2 2 2 2
C309.4 Describe the VI signature testing methods and technology.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
2 2 2 2
C309.5 Explain about the boundary scan test techniques, architecture and applications.
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
2 2 2 2
C309.6 Explain the ATE test program generation, semiconductor test and the use of load boards
3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
21 21 14 14 14 - - - 14 14
Ave 3 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2.33 2.33 2.33 2.33
Page 224 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM62 AUTOMATED TEST SYSTEM
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
PART – A (1 X 10 = 10)
1. Mention the methods of testing.
2. Expand PCB.
3. List the types of memory module.
4. What is digital guarding?
5. List out few passive and Active Components.
6. What is the effect of curve trace?
7. Expand BSDL.
8. List the application of Boundary Scan Test.
9. What do you mean by test Fixtures?
10. Expand STDF.
PART – B (3 x5=15)
UNIT - I
11. Write a note on principles of memory testing.
12. How will you track PCB?
UNIT – II
13. Describe in detail about node forcing techniques.
14. Brief about international defense standard.
UNIT – III
15. How will you identity the ageing effects of the components with VI curve trace.
16. Differentiate between Good & suspect interpretation
UNIT – IV
17. Write a note on Boundary scan standard.
18. Describe in detail about serial vector format.
Page 225 of 260
UNIT – V
19. Write a note on digital simulator.
20. Describe in brief about Test fixtures.
PART - C (10x5=50)
UNIT – I
21. Explain about the trouble shooting techniques in manual and automated PCB. (10)
22. Explain any one method of testing in detail. (10)
UNIT – II
23. Explain in detail about functional testing of mixed integrated circuits. (10)
24. A) Write a note on the concept of Digital Guarding. (5)
B) Write a note on the Auto Compensation. (5)
UNIT - III
25. Explain in detail about I/O Characteristics of Digital Integrated Circuits. (10)
26. Explain about the Understanding Composite VI-Curve and it deviations in detail. (10)
UNIT – IV
27. Draw & explain about Boundary Scan Architecture (10)
28. Explain in detail Digital Integrated Circuit Test using Boundary Scan Techniques. (10)
UNIT – V
29. Explain in detail about STDF. (10)
30. Describe in detail about Semiconductor Test use of Load Boards. (10)
Page 226 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM63.1 BROADCAST ENGINEERING
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM63.1 Broadcast Engineering
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessmen
t
End Semester
Examination Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Television Signals &Systems and Cameras 14
II Video Recording and Editing 14
III Television Studios 14
IV Mobile Television Production and Television Signal
Transmission
14
V Earth station and Satellite News Gathering 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 227 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT NAMEOFTHETOPIC HOURS
I
Television Signals &Systems and Cameras
Television Signals and Systems: Horizontal and vertical frame and field rate-Resolution
Video Bandwidth –Sync-Blanking signals-Colour Burst -Sensitivity – Television Standards
PALNTSC and SECAM .
Broadcast Cameras: Primary and Secondary Colours- Photo Voltaic and Photo emissive
effects- Working Principle of Video Cameras- CCD Cameras- Parts of Video Camera-
Preheat , Genlock , white Balance , Gain , Iris , Pedestal etc- Zoom Control , servo ,
manual , Focus control , Auto , Manual , Camera Viewfinders , its indicators and controls
– Video camera Lenses- Different types of camera angles- camera movements-Different
Types of Television Cameras.
14
II
Video Recording and Editing
Video Recoding: Video Formats- Types of Video Tapes- Video compression- sampling -
Online recording with multiple camera set up.
Editing in Television: Video Editing- Linear and Non Linear Editing-Editing Equipments-
Effects etc-Lights and Lighting Techniques-Importance of Lighting for Television- need for
lighting- characteristics of Light- color temperature- Basic Lighting Principles.
14
III
Television Studios
Television Studio Layout, Infrastructure Requirements of a Television Studio – Vision
Mixers-Studio Recording and Playbacks-Video Routers-waveform Monitors- Vector scope -
Audio Mixers -Telephone Hybrids - Intercommunication to various areas in a Television
Studio etc- Central Apparatus Area
(CAA) – Master Control Room (MCR) -Typical Hardware Equipments used for signal
distribution in a Television Studio-Signal Flow in a Television Studio.
14
IV
Mobile Television Production and Television Signal Transmission
Mobile Television Production: Outdoor shooting of Television Programmes –ENG Vans –
EFP Van and Outside Broadcasting Vans (OB Vans) –Connectivity to OB Van from the field
–Multi camera set up for OB Van production – Audio/Video signal path and recording in a
OB Van -Coverage of LIVE Events from the field to the Television Studios - Live coverage
Interfaces to the OB Van.
Television Signal Transmission: Transmission Technologies - Terrestrial Transmission -
Satellite and cable Broadcasting - Up linking - down linking, DTH.
14
Page 228 of 260
V
Earth station and Satellite News Gathering
Earth station: Up linking of Television signal to satellite from TV Station-Down linking
signal for monitoring – Earth station Layout –Encoders- compression & Multiplexing
Equipments used in Earth Station-Hub and Antennas used in Earth stations - Typical
Layout for up linking and Down linking of signals-Teleport- Signal Monitoring system s for
Video and Audio .
Satellite News Gathering: Satellite News Gathering (SNG) Systems- Typical building
blocks of a DSNG System.
14
Text Books:
1. Michael Robin,Digital Television Fundamentals: Design and Installation of Audio and Video, McGrawhill,1998.
2. Jerry.C.Whitaker, Handbook of Broadcast Engineering, McGrawhill,2005
Page 229 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM63.2 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND TELEMEDICINE
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM63.2 Bio
Medical
Instrumentation
And Telemedicine
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semeste
r
Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
Unit No Topics Hours
I Physiological & clinical measurement 14
II Bio - medical recorders 14
III Therapeutic instruments 14
IV Biomedical imaging techniques 14
V Telemedicine and medical informatics 14
Revision and Test 05
Total 75
Page 230 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Unit Name of the Topic Hours
`
I
BIO-ELECTRIC SIGNALS AND ELECTRODES
Elementary ideas of cell structure, Bio – potential and their generation –
resting and action potential – propagation of action potential. Electrodes –
Micro – Skin – surface – needle electrodes.
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT: Measurement of Blood pressure (direct,
indirect) – instantaneous flow (Electromagnetic flow meter, ultrasonic
blood flow meter) – Blood PH Measurement -Measurement of Respiration
rate – lung volume – heart rate – Temperature (body temperature & Skin
temperature) Chromatography, Photometry, Flurometry.
14
II
BIO - MEDICAL RECORDERS
Electro cardiograph (ECG) – Lead system – ECG electrodes – ECG amplifiers
– ECG recording units – analysis of ECG curves. Nervous system – EEG
recorder – 10-20 lead system – recording techniques – EEG wave types –
Clinical use of EEG – brain tumour- Electro – myograph (EMG) – EMG
waves – measurement of conduction velocity – EMG recording techniques
– Electro retinograph (ERG) -Audiometer – principle – types – Basics
audiometer working.
14
III
THERAPEUTIC INSTRUMENTS
Cardiac pacemaker – classification – External pace makers – implantable
pacemaker – pacing techniques – programmable pacemaker – power
source of implantable pacemakers (Hg batteries, nuclear batteries, Lithium
cells)- Cardiac defibrillators – types – AC – DC defibrillators- Heart lung
machine with block diagram – Oxygenators – Blood pumps – peristaltic
pump – Heart valves – Problems of artificial heart valves. Dialysis – Hemo
dialysis – peritoneal dialysis.
Endoscopy – principle of working and applications-Endoscopic Laser
Coagulator and application=Physiotherapy equipment-Short wave
diathermy-microwave diathermy-Ultrasonic Therapy unit (Block/Circuit)-
Ventilators- types – modern ventilator block diagram.
14
IV
BIOTELEMETRY AND PATIENT SAFETY
Introduction to Bio telemetry – physiological – adaptable to biotelemetry
– components of a bio telemetry system –application of telemetry–
elements of biotelemetry: AM, FM transmitter and receiver-
requirements for bio telemetry system– radio telemetry with sub carrier
Page 231 of 260
– single channel and multi-channel telemetry–application of telemetry in
patient care-Problem associated with implantable telemetry-Fluid
balance-electrolytic balance-acid base balance.
Patient Safety: Physiological effects of electric current – Micro and
macro shock – leakage current – shock hazards from electrical
equipment. Methods of Accident Prevention – Grounding – Double
Insulation –Protection by low voltage – Ground fault circuit interrupter –
Isolation of patient connected parts – Isolated power distribution system.
Safely aspects in electro surgical units– burns, high frequency current
hazards, Explosion hazards.
14
V
MODERN IMAGING TECHNIQUES AND TELEMEDICINE
LASER beam properties – block diagram – operation of CO2 and ND Yag
LASER – applications of LASER in medicine. X ray apparatus – block
diagram – operation – special techniques in X-ray imaging – Tomogram –
computerized Axial tomography – Ultrasonic imaging techniques – Echo
cardigraphy – Angiography – CT scanner – Magnetic resonance imaging
techniques.
Telemedicine: Introduction – working – applications – computer networks
in healthcare-LAN Topology – Internet techniques- Applicaions:
Teleradiology – Telecardiology – Telepsychiatry – Telesurgery –
Advantages and Disadvantages of Telemedicine-Introduction of medical
informatics-hospital information systems.
14
Text Books:
1. Leslie Cromwell ,Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, Fred.J. Weibell, Erich A.P Feither –Fourth edition.
2. B.R.Klin ,Introduction to Medical Electronics- Second edition. Reference Books:
1. Jacobson and Webstar , Medicine and Clinical Engineering- Second edition. 2. R.S.Khandpur , Handbook of Bio Medical Instrumentation- Third edition.
Page 232 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C310.1 Enumerate the generation of Bio-Electric signals, Electrodes and clinical measurement
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
2 2 2 2
C310.2 Describe the principle operation of ECG, EEG, EMG & ERG recorders.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
C310.3
Analyze the basic concepts of Pacemakers, oxygenator, Dialysis, Endoscopy and physiotherapy Equipments.
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
C310.4 Explain Bio- Telemetry and its elements
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3
C310.5 Describe about patient safety and the various methods of accident prevention
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
C310.6 Explain the various modern imaging techniques and concept of telemedicine
3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
3 3 3 3
21 21 14 - - - - - 14 14
Ave 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2.83 2.83 2.83 2.83
Page 233 of 260
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time – Three Hours Maximum Marks: 75
Subject Code & Name: ECM63.2 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND TELEMEDICINE
Note: 1. Answer ALL the Questions in Part-A (1 mark each) 2. Answer any ONE Questions from each Unit in PART-B (3 mark each)
3. Answer any ONE Question from each Unit in PART-C (10 mark each) 4. The Question paper contains TWO Pages
Part A (1x10=10)
1. What is meant by respiration rate 2. what is chromatography 3. State the purpose of RL electrode in ECG 4. what is pure tone audiometer 5. Give the types of blood pump 6. Define dialysis 7. State the application of telemetry 8. what is grounding 9. Expand LASER 10. What is telemedicine
Part B (3x5=15)
UNIT-I
11. Describe resting and action potential 12. With a diagram explain body surface electrode
UNIT - II
13. Write short notes on brain tumor 14. Analyze different types of normal EE G wave forms
UNIT - III
15. Write short notes on external pacemaker 16. Compare Hemodialysis and peritonial dialysis
UNIT - IV
17. Differentiate Micro and Macro shock. 18. Discuss the concept of telemedicine.
Page 234 of 260
UNIT - V
19. Write short notes on Ultrasonic image technique. 20. Draw only the block diagram of echocardiograph.
Part C (10x5=50)
UNIT - I
21. (i) Write short notes on measurement of Heart rate. (5) (ii)Explain about lung volume measurement . (5)
22. Discuss about the direct method of blood pressure measurement. (10)
UNIT – II
23. (i)Explain EMG recording techniques (5) (ii)Discuss about three types of audiometer (5)
24. Draw the block diagram of ECG and explain its working (10)
UNIT - III
25. What is cardiac defibrillator? explain AC and DC defibrillator (10)
26. List and explain various power sources used for implantable pace maker (10)
UNIT – IV 27. (i)Explain the various components of bio telemetry (5)
(ii)Write down safety aspects in surgical unit (5) 28.List out various methods of accident prevention and explain each. (10) UNIT - V
29. Explain the basic block diagram of magnetic resonance Imaging techniques(10) 30.Draw the block diagram of CT scanner and explain its operation (10)
Page 235 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM63.3 MOBILE COMMUNICATION
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code & Name
Instruction Examination
ECM63.3 Mobile Communication
Hours/ Week
Hours/ Semester
Marks
Duration in Hours
5 75
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Topics and Allocation of Hours:
UNIT TOPIC TIME(HRS)
I Introduction to Mobile Communication 14
II Broadcast Systems 14
III Wireless Transmission (2G) 14
IV Wireless Networking (3G) 14
V Mobile Network Layer &Transport Layer 14
Revision – Test 05
TOTAL 75
Page 236 of 260
DETAILED SYLLABUS
UNIT
NAMEOFTHETOPIC
HOURS
I
INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE COMMUNICATION Evolution of Mobile Radio Communication, Mobile Radio Telephony in India and around the world, Examples of Wireless Communication Systems: Paging system, Cordless telephones systems, Cellular telephone Systems, Trends in Cellular Radio and personal Communications CELLULAR CONCEPT: Frequency reuse, Channel Assignment strategies, Handoff Strategies, Prioritizing Handoffs, Interference and system capacity, Improving coverage and capacity in cellular systems ,Cell splitting ,Sectoring, Repeaters for range extension
14
II
BROAD CAST SYSTEMS Introduction –Cyclical repetition of data – Digital audio broadcasting–multimedia object transfer protocol– Digital video broadcasting–DVB data broadcasting, DVB for high speed internet access – Convergence of broadcasting and mobile communications
14
III
WIRELESS TRANSMISSION(2G) Global system for mobile (GSM)- services and features –Radio subsystem-channel types- Example of a GSM call – Frame structure for GSM–DECT system architecture, protocol architecture–TETRA –UMTS and IMT-2000 -radio interface, UTRAN, core network, handover - CDMA digital cellular standard(IS– 95): Frequency and channel specifications-Forward CDMA channel and Reverse CDMA channel
14
IV
WIRELESS NETWORKING (3G) Mobile Services(2.5G): GPRS: GPRS Functional groups–architecture- network nodes–procedures -billing. WAP: WAP Model –WAP Gateway-WAP Protocols – WAPUA prof and caching, wireless bearers for WAP, WAP developer toolkits- Mobile station application execution environment. Mobile Services(3G): Paradigm Shifts in 3GSystems -W-CDMA andCDMA2000 -Improvements on core network –Quality of service in 3G-Wireless OS for 3G handset -3G systems and field trials-Other trail systems - Impact on manufacture and operator technologies.
14
Page 237 of 260
V
MOBILE NETWORK LAYER &TRANSPORT LAYER Mobile IP – Goals, assumptions and requirements, Entities and terminology, IP Packet delivery, Agent discovery, Registration, tunneling and encapsulation , Optimization, Reverse tunneling, IPv6, IP micro- mobility support - Dynamic host configuration protocol –mobile ad-hoc network–routing – destination sequence distance vector –Dynamic source routing –alternative metrics TCP –Congestion control –slow start –faster transmit/fast recovery– implications of mobility– Classical TCP improvements – indirect –snooping –Mobile–Transmission timeout freezing– selective retransmission-Transaction oriented –TCP over 2.5/3G wireless networks
14
Reference Books: 1. Wireless Communications Principles and Practice - Theodore S. Rappaport, Pearson
Education, 2003 2. Mobile Communications - Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education, 2009, Second edition 3. Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures - Yi-BingLin, Imrich Chlamtac, Wiley, 2001 4. Mobile Cellular Communication - Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, Pearson Education, 2012 5. Wireless Digital Communications - Kamilo Feher, PHI, 2003 6. Mobile Cellular Communications - W.C.Y. Lee, 2nd Edition, MC Graw Hill, 1995 7. Wireless Networks - P. Nicopolitidis, Wiley, 2003 8. Wireless Communications and Networks - William Stallings, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India-
2006
Page 238 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM64 COMPUTER HARDWARE SERVICING AND NETWORKING PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM64 Computer
Hardware, Servicing
and Networking
Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
5
25 75 100
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
PART-A
1. Identification of System Layout.
Front panel indicators & switches and Front side & rear side connectors.
Familiarize the computer system Layout: Marking positions of SMPS, Motherboard,
FDD, HDD, CD, DVD and add on cards.
Configure bios setup program and troubleshoot the typical problems using BIOS utility.
2. HARD DISK
Install Hard Disk.
Configure CMOS-Setup.
Partition and Format Hard Disk.
Identify Master /Slave / IDE Devices.
Practice with scan disk, disk cleanup, disk De-fragmenter, Virus Detecting and Rectifying Software.
Page 239 of 260
3. a) Install and Configure a DVD Writer and a Blu-ray Disc writer. b) Recording a Blank DVD and Blu-ray Disc.
4. Printer Installation and Servicing:
a) Install and configure Dot matrix printer and Laser printer
b) Troubleshoot the above printers.
c) Check and connect the data cable connectivity
5. Install and configure Scanner, Web cam and bio-metric device with system.
Troubleshoot the problems
6. Assemble a system with add on cards and check the working condition of the system and
Install OS.
7. Dual OS Installation
8 .Assembling and Disassembling of Laptop to identify the parts and to install OS and configure it.
PART-B
9. Do the following Cabling works in a network
a) Cable Crimping b) Standard Cabling c) Cross Cabling d) IO connector crimping
e) Testing the crimped cable using a cable tester
10. Configure Host IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway in a system in LAN (TCP/IP
Configuration).
Configure Internet connection and use IPCONFIG, PING / Tracert and Netstat utilities to debug the network issues
11. Interface two PCs using Peer To Peer network using connectivity devices – Switch and Router in a LAN and share the Drives and Folders.
12. Transfer files between systems in LAN using FTP Configuration, install Print server in a LAN and Share the printer in a network.
13. Configure DNS to establish interconnection between systems and describe how a name is
mapped to IP Address
14. Install and configure Network Devices: HUB, Switch and Routers
15. Install and Configure Wired and Wireless NIC and transfer files between systems in LAN and
Page 240 of 260
List of Equipments
Software Tools:
Windows Vista or Windows 7 Office Package : Microsoft Office 2003 or Office 2007/Open Office
Nero software
Reference:
Lab manual, “Computer Hardware and Networking Practical”, MPC.D.7.09.ECM66
S.No Name of the Equipments Required Nos
1. Computer with Pentium / Core processors with inbuilt NIC 10
2. Hard disk drive 500 GB SATA 5
3. Antivirus Software 1
4. Laptop 1
5. CD/DVD writer 10
6. Blue ray disc writer 1
7. Blank DVD 10
8. Pen drive 8GB 1
9. Laser printer MFP 1
10. Scanner 1
11. Webcam 1
12. Biometric device 1
13. Server(Windows 3) 1
14. Network Cables
5 meters
15. Crimping tool 6
16. RJ45 Tester 2
17. Modem,Switch,Router,Hub(each) 1
Page 241 of 260
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Block Diagram 20
2 Procedure 10
3 Connection & Handling the Equipment 10
4 Installation & Execution 20
5 Result 10
6 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
CO-PO –PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C311.1
Identifying various parts of the PC, Processors, BIOS setup & Storage devices(HDD) features & their functions
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2
2 2 2 2
C311.2
Carry out the installation of OS and partition, format of hard disk &install antivirus software and rectify the problem.
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
C311.3 Execute different types of I/O devices &trouble shooting the problems.
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C311.4
Carry out the Assemble and Disassemble the parts of the computer and Laptops trouble shooting the problems
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
C311.5
Use crimping tool to form a standard cabling. Implement peer to peer connection using CAT 5 cable& share the folders
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2
2 2 2 2
C311.6
Use FTP to send & receive files & execute it and also Use DNS to map IP address & establish interconnection between systems using HUB, switch and routers
3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2
2 2 2 2
18 12 18 12 - - 12 18 12 12
Ave 3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Page 242 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM65 AUTOMATED TEST SYSTEM PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM65 Automated Test System Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3 25 75 100
EQUIPMENTS REQUIRED
S.No Name of the Equipments
1 PCB Shorts Locator Trainer
2 V-I Characteristics Trainer System
3 Functional Testing Trainer System
4 In-Circuit Measurement Trainer System
5 Boundary scan Test Trainer System
6 Digital And Analog Simulator
List of Experiments 1. Locate a Short in a circuit Board using Short Locator. 2. Test and verify the combinational logic circuits NAND, NOR, Half-Adder, Half- Subtractors, Multiplexers, De-multiplexer, Decoder & Encoder using functional test method.
Page 243 of 260
3. Test and verify the Sequential Logic Circuits D-FF, RS-FF, Latch, Counter, Shift
Register using functional test method. 4. Test and verify the Memory Devices SDRAM/DRAM Chip. Using functional test method. 5. a. Test and verify the digital circuits in a circuit using auto compensation technique. b.Test and verify the open emitter circuit using pull down resistor. c.Test and verify the open collector circuit using pull up resistor. 6. Test the functionality of operational amplifier in Inverting, Non-inverting and voltage
follower mode.
7. Test the VI characteristics of R, L,C using signature method. 8. Test the VI characteristics of electronic components Diode, Zener Diode, NPN/PNP
Transistor using signature method .
9. Test the VI characteristics of RC Filter ,Low Pass Filter , Band Pass Filter using signature method.
10Test the VI characteristics of electronic components MOSFET and Transistor using Trigger pulse and signature method.
11.Test the VI characteristics of electronic components SCR and Opto coupler using Trigger pulse and signature method.
12. Test RLC circuit using in-circuit measurement method. 13. Test the Boundary Scan IC using JTAG port and non boundary scan IC using
boundary scan IC. 14. Detect and list down the stuck to VCC and stuck to Gnd pins in a boundary scan IC. 15. Develop a device model for NAND and NOR using device library and create a test
pattern for testing.
Page 244 of 260
List of Equipments
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Circuit Diagram 20 20
2 Procedure 25
3 Execution & Handling Of Equipment 15
4 Result 10
5 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
S.No Name of the Equipments Required Nos
1. PCB Shorts Locator Trainer
1
2. V-I Characteristics Trainer System 1
3. Functional Testing Trainer System 1
4. In-Circuit Measurement Trainer System 1
5. Boundary Scan Test Trainer System 1
6. Digital And Analog Simulator 1
Page 245 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C312.1 Test short circuit in a circuit board using short locator.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C312.2
Test and verify combinational logic circuit & sequential logic circuit & memory devices in functional test method.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
C312.3
Test the digital circuits using auto compensation technique and test open emitter circuit using pull down resistor & open collector circuit using pull up resistor.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2
2 2 2 2
C312.4 Test the VI characteristics of electronic components and filters using signature method.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2
2 2 2 3
C312.5 Test RLC circuit using in-circuit measurement method.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
C312.6 Test the boundary scan IC and non-boundary scan IC
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
C312.7
Develop a device model for NAND & NOR using device library and create a test pattern for testing.
3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
Total 24 16 24 16 - - - 24 16 16
Ave 3 2 3 2 - - - 3 2 2 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.57
Page 246 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM66 ELECTRONIC SIMULATION PRACTICAL
Teaching and Scheme of Examination: No. of weeks per semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM66 Electronic Simulation Practical
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
5 75
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Note: 1. All experiments should be designed and verified through SPICE simulation tool (like
PSPICE/Multisim/ Lab VIEW/ OrCAD/ TINA)
List of Experiments
1. Study of simulation software features using simple circuits
2. Rectifier Circuits (Half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers with filters)
3. Power supply design with regulators
4. Waveform generators using transistors (Astable multivibrators)
5. Waveform generators using transistors (mono stable multivibrators)
6. Clippers and Clampers
7. Op-amp applications – I (any three circuits)
(Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, voltage follower, integrator, Differentiator, summing
amplifier, Difference amplifier)
8. Op-amp applications – II (any three circuits)
(Hartley and phase shift oscillators, sine, square and triangular waveform generators,
precision rectifiers)
Page 247 of 260
9. Instrumentation amplifiers
10. AM Modulation and Demodulation
11. FM Modulation and Demodulation
12. ASK Modulation and Demodulation
13. FSK Modulation and Demodulation
14. PSK Modulation and Demodulation
15. Single side PCB layout design using CAD tool
16. Draw the schematic of simple electronic circuit and design of PCB layout using CAD tool
17. Multilayer PCB layout design using CAD tool
List of Equipment
HARDWARE REQUIRMENT:
Desktop/laptop computers: 10 nos
My DAQ kit:10 Nos
Laser printer: 01 no
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT:
Multisim/ Lab VIEW software
Page 248 of 260
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C313.1 Use simulation software designed Rectifier circuits and power supply
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C313.2
Simulate the waveform generators using transistors( Astable and Monostable) and clippers & clampers
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
C313.3
Carry out the different types of Op-amp application circuits (I & II) and instrumentation amplifiers using Op- amp
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
C313.4 Simulate the different types of modulation and demodulation (AM and FM)
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C313.5 Simulate the different types of modulation and demodulation (ASK,FSK and PSK)
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C313.6
Draw the schematic of simple electronic circuit and design the Single side & multilayer side PCB layout
3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3
2 2 3 3
21 21 21 14 - - - 21 21 21
Ave 3 3 3 2 - - - 3 3 3 2.5 2.5 2.67 2.67
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
1 Circuit Diagram 20
2 Connection 20
3 Procedure 10
4 Execution 10
5 Result 10
6 Viva – Voce 05
Total 75
Page 249 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VI
Subject Code & Name: ECM67 PROJECTWORK
Teaching and Scheme of Examinations: No. of Weeks per Semester: 15
Subject Code &
Name Instruction Examination
ECM67 Project work
Hours/
Week
Hours/
Semester Marks
Duration
in Hours
4 60
Continuous
Assessmen
t
End
Semester
Examination
Total
3
25 75 100
Detail of Assessment Period ofassessment Max. Marks
First Review 6th week 10
Second Review 15th week 10
Attendance Entire semester 5
Total 25
Page 250 of 260
Evaluation for Autonomous Examination:
Details of Mark allocation Max. Marks
Marks for Report Preparation, Demo, Viva-voce 65
Marks for answers of 4 questions which is to be set by the
external examiner from the given question bank consisting of
questions in the following two topics Disaster Management and
Environmental Management. Out of four questions two
questions to appear from each of the above topics
i.e., 2 questions x 2 topics = 4 questions
4 questionsx2½marks =10 Marks
10
Total 75
DETAILED SYLLABUS ENVIRONMENTAL & DISASTERMANAGEMENT 1. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT Introduction–Environmental Ethics–Assessment of Socio Economic Impact– Environmental Audit–Mitigation of adverse impact on Environment–Importance of Pollution Control –Types of Industries and Industrial Pollution.Solidwastemanagement–CharacteristicsofIndustrialwastes– Methods of Collection, transfer and disposal of solid wastes–Converting waste to energy–Hazardous waste management Treatment technologies. Waste water management–Characteristics of Industrial effluents–Treatment and disposal methods– Pollution of water sources and effects on human health. Air pollution management –Sources and effects– Dispersion of air pollutants–Air pollution control methods–Air quality management. Noise pollution management –Effects of noise on people– Noise control methods.
Page 251 of 260
2. DISASTER MANAGEMENT Introduction–Disasters due to natural calamities such as Earthquake,Rain,Flood, Hurricane, Cyclones etc–Manmade Disasters–Crisis due to fires, accidents ,strikes etc – Loss of property and life. Disaster Mitigation measures– Causes for major disasters–Risk Identification–Hazard Zones–Selection of sites for Industries and residential buildings–Minimum distance from Sea–Orientation of Buildings–Stability of Structures–Fire escapes in buildings- Cyclone shelters–Warning systems. Disaster Management–Preparedness, Response, Recovery–Arrangements to be made in the industries factories and buildings–Mobilization of Emergency Services-Search and Rescue operations–First Aids–Transportation of affected people–Hospital facilities–Fire fighting arrangements–Communication systems–Restoration of Power supply–Getting assistance of neighbors/Other organizations in Recovery and Rebuilding works–Financial commitments–Compensations to be paid–Insurances– Rehabilitation.
LIST O F QUESTIONS
1. ENVIRONMENTRAL MANAGEMENT
1. What is the responsibility of an Engineer-in-charge of an Industry with respect to
Public Health?
2. Define Environmental Ethic.
3. How Industries play their role in polluting the environment?
4. What is the necessity of pollution control? What are all the different organizations
you know, which deal with pollution control?
5. List out the different types of pollutions caused by a Chemical/Textile/Leather/
Automobile / Cement factory.
6. What is meant by Hazardous waste?
7. Define Industrial waste management.
8. Differentiate between garbage, rubbish, refuse and trash based on their composition
and source.
9. Explain briefly how the quantity of solid waste generated in an industry could be
reduced.
10. What are the objectives of treatments of solid wastes be foe
disposal?
11. What are the different methods of disposal of solid wastes?
Page 252 of 260
12. Explain how the principle of recycling could be applied in the process of waste
minimization.
13. Define the term ‘Environmental Waste Audit’.
14. List and discuss the factors pertinent to the selection of land fill site.
15. Explain the purpose of daily cover in a sanitary land fill and state the minimum
desirable depth of daily cover.
16. Describe any two methods of converting waste into energy.
17. What actions, a local body such as a municipality could take when the agency
appointed for collecting and disposing the solid wastes fails to do the work
continuously for number of days?
18. Write a note on Characteristics of hazardous waste.
19. What is the difference between municipal and industrial effluent?
20. List few of the undesirable parameters/pollutants anticipated in the effluents from oil
refinery industry /thermal power plants /textile industries /woolen mills/ dye
industries/electroplating industries/cement plants/leather industries (any two maybe
asked)
21. Explain briefly the process of Equalization and Neutralization of waste water of varying
characteristics discharged from an Industry.
22. Explain briefly the physical treatments “Sedimentation” and “Floatation” processes in
the waste water treatment.
23. Explain briefly when and how chemical/biological treatments are given to the waste
water.
24. List the four common advanced waste water treatment processes and the pollutants
they remove.
25. Describe refractory organics and the method used to remove them from the
effluent. 26. Explain biological nitrification and de-nitrification.
27. Describe the basic approaches to land treatment of Industrial Effluent.
28. Describethelocationsfortheultimatedisposalofsludgeandthetreatmentsteps needed
prior to ultimate disposal.
29. List any five Industries, which act as the major sources for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
30. List out the names of any three hazardous air pollutants and their effects on human
health.
Page 253 of 260
31. Explain the influence of moisture, temperature and sunlight on these verity of air
pollution effects on materials.
32. Differentiate between acute and chronic health effects from Air
Pollution.
33. Define the term Acid rain and explain how it occurs.
34. Discuss briefly the causes for global warming and its consequences
35. Suggest suitable Air pollution control devices for a few pollutants and sources.
36. Explain how evaporative emissions and exhaust emissions are commonly controlled.
37. What are the harmful elements present in the automobile smokes? How their
presence could be controlled?
38. What is the Advantage of Ozone layer in the atmosphere? State few reasons for its
destruction.
39. Explain the mechanism by which hearing damage occurs.
40. List any five effects of noise other than hearing damage.
41. Explain why impulsive noise is more dangerous than steady state noise.
42. Explain briefly the Source–Path – Receiver concept of Noise control.
43. Where silencers or mufflers are used? Explain how they reduce the noise.
44. Describetwotechniquestoprotectthereceiverfromhearinglosswhendesign/ redress for
noise control fail.
45. What are the problems faced by the people residing along the side of a railway track
and near to an Airport? What provisions could be made in their houses to reduce the
problem? 2. DISASTER MANAGEMENT 1. What is meant by Disaster Management? What are the different stages of Disaster
management?
2. Differentiate Natural Disasters and Man made Disasters with examples. 3. Describe the necessity of Risk identification and Assessment Surveys while planning a
project.
4. What is Disasters recovery and what does it mean to an Industry?
5. What are the factors to be considered while planning the rebuilding works after a
major disaster due to flood /cyclone / earthquake? (Anyone maybe asked)
Page 254 of 260
6. List out the public emergency services available in the state, which could be
approached for help during a natural disaster.
7. Specify the role played by an Engineer in the process of Disaster management.
8. What is the cause for Earthquakes? How they are measured? Which parts of India are
more vulnerable for frequent earthquakes?
9. What was the cause for theTsunami2004 which inflicted heavy loss to life and
property along the coast of Tamil Nadu? Specify its epicenter and magnitude.
10. Specify the Earthquake Hazard Zones in which the following towns of Tamil Nadu
lie:(a)Chennai(b)Nagapattinam(c)Coimbatore(d)Madurai(e) Salem.
11. Which parts of India are experiencing frequent natural calamities such as (a) heavy
rainfall (b) huge losses due to floods (c) severe cyclones?
12. Define basic wind speed. What will be the peak wind speed in (a) Very high damage
risk zone –A, (b) High damage risk zone, (c) Low damage risk zone?
13. Specify the minimum is tance from the Sea shore and minimum height above them ean
sea level, desirable for the location of buildings.
14. Explainhowthetopographyofthesiteplaysaroleinthedisasterscausedbyfloods and
cyclones.
15. Explain how the shape and orientation of buildings could reduce the damages due to
cyclones.
16. What is a cyclone shelter? When and where it is provided? What are its
requirements?
17. What Precautionary measures have to be taken by the authorities before opening a
dam for discharging the excess water in to a canal/river?
18. What are the causes for fire accidents? Specify the remedial measures to be taken in
buildings to avoid fire accidents.
19. What is afire escape in multistoried buildings? What are its requirements?
20. How the imamates of a multistory building are to be evacuated in the event of a
fire/Chemical spill/Toxic Air Situation/Terrorist attack, (anyone maybe asked).
21. Describe different firefighting arrangements to be provided in an
Industry.
22. Explain the necessity of disaster warning systems in Industries.
23. Explain how rescue operations have to be carried out in the case of collapse of
buildings due to earthquake/ blast/Cyclone /flood.
Page 255 of 260
24. What are the necessary steps to be taken to avoid dangerous epidemics after a flood
disaster?
25. What relief works that have to be carried out to save the lives of workers when the
factory area is suddenly affected by a dangerous gas leak/sudden flooding?
26. What are the difficulties faced by an Industry when there is a sudden power failure?
How such a situation could be managed?
27. What are the difficulties faced by the Management when there is a group clash
between the workers? How such a situation could be managed?
28. What will be the problems faced by the management of an Industry when a worker
dies because of the failure of a mechanical device due to poor maintenance? How to
manage such a situation?
29. What precautionary measures have to be taken to avoid accidents to labourers in the
Industry in a workshop/during handling of dangerous Chemicals/during construction
of buildings/during the building maintenance works?
30. Explain the necessity of medical care facilities in an Industry/ Project site.
31. Explain the necessity of proper training to the employees of Industries dealing with
hazardous products, to act during disasters.
32. What type of disaster is expected in coal mines, cotton mills, Oil refineries, shipyards
and gas plants?
33. What is meant by Emergency Plan Rehearsal? What are the advantages of such
Rehearsals?
34. What action you will take when your employees could not reach the factory site
because of continuous strike by Public Transport workers?
35. What immediate actions you will initiate when the quarters of your factory workers
are suddenly flooded due to the breach in a nearly lake / dam, during heavy rain?
36. What steps you will take to avoid a break down when the workers union of your
Industry have given a strike notice?
37. List out few possible crisis in an organization caused by its workers? What could be
the part of the middle level officials in managing such crisis?
38. What types of warning systems are available to alert the people in the case of
predicted disasters, such as floods, cyclone etc.
39. Explain the necessity of Team work in the crisis management in an Industry/Local
body.
Page 256 of 260
40. What factors are to be considered while fixing compensation to the workers in the
case of severe accidents causing disability/ death to them?
41. Explain the legal/financial problems the management has to face if safely measures
taken by them are found to be in adequate.
42. Describe the importance of insurance to men and machinery of an Industry dealing
with dangerous jobs.
43. What precautions have to be taken while storing explosives in a match/fire crackers
factory?
44. What are the arrangements required for emergency rescue works in the case of
Atomic Power Plants?
45. Why residential quarters are not constructed nearer to Atomic Power Plants?
CO-PO-PSO MAPPING
CO CO’S DESCRIPTION PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
C314.1 Define the problem conceived as project
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C314.2 Implement the technical knowledge acquired.
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C314.3 Estimate the cost required for developing a project
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
C314.4 Develop solutions for Real time applications
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
C314.5 Carry out the guidelines to become successful entrepreneur
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
C314.6 Apply disaster and environment management techniques.
3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
18 18 18 12 12 18 18 18 18 18
Ave 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2.67 2.67 2.67 2.67
Page 257 of 260
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Semester : VII
Subject Code & Name: ECM74 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING – II
The students are expected to gain a working experience in various departments of an
industry / organization and hence learning the industrial management in a practical way.
The students have to undergo a six months industrial training (PHASE II) during the VII semester
in a related industry / organization. During the training period the students are maintaining an
Industrial diary to record their observation and learning. On completion of training, a training
report should be submitted to the Head of the Department. Industrial training of Sandwich
students will be evaluated based on Continuous Assessment of two periodical reviews and an End
semester Examination on Assessment of Training Report and viva-voce.
SANDWICH DIPLOMA COURSE - INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
1. Introduction
The main objective of the Sandwich Diploma Course is to mould a well rounded technician
acclimated with industrial environment while being a student in the institution.
The Sandwich Diploma Course study is pursued by students, in 7 semesters of 3½ years duration,
the subjects of 3 years - Full Time Diploma Course being regrouped for academic convenience.
While in the 4th semester students undergo Industrial Training-I for 6 months (December through
May). They also do course work in the institution for one day in a week, while in the 7th semester
they undergo another spell of 6 months (June through November) Industrial training-II.
The Apprenticeship (Amendment) Act 1973 is followed in regulating the Industrial training
procedure for Sandwich Course.
I SEM II SEM III SEM IV SEM V SEM VI SEM VII SEM
Institutional study
Industrial Training
Page 258 of 260
First Spell - IV Semester (December - May)
Second Spell - VII Semester (June – November)
2. Attendance Certification
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by industrial supervisor
in the prescribed form. Students have also to put their signature on the form and submit it to the
institutional staff in-charge. Attendance and submission of Review reports will be duly considered
while awarding the Continuous Assessment mark.
3. Training Reports
The students have to prepare two types of reports:
Weekly report in the form of diary to be submitted to the concerned staff in-charge of the institution. This will be reviewed while awarding Continuous Assessment mark.
Comprehensive report at the end of each phase of Industrial Training will be reviewed while awarding End semester Examination marks.
3.1 Industrial Training Diary
Students are required to maintain the record of day - to- day work done. Such
record is called Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days of
the week should be accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence, Absence,
Leave, Holiday etc). The concerned Industrial supervisor is to check periodically these progress
reports.
3.2 Comprehensive Training Report
In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report
on training with details of the organisation where the training was undergone after attestation by
the supervisors. The comprehensive report should be incorporating study of plant/ product
/process/ construction along with intensive in-depth study on any one of the topics such as
processes, methods, tooling, construction and equipment, highlighting aspects of quality,
productivity and system. The comprehensive report should be completed in the last week of
Industrial training. Any data, drawings etc should be incorporated with the consent of the
Organisation.
Page 259 of 260
4. Scheme of Evaluation
Components SCHEME OF EVALUATION
No. Allocation Marks
Continuous
Assessment Mark
1 First review 20
2 Second review 20
3 Attendance 10
End Examination 4 Comprehensive Training Report 20
5 Viva-Voce 30
Total 100